2015 EDGE Owner’s Manual
2015 EDGE Owner’s Manual
fordowner.com ford.ca
December 2014
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Edge
Litho in U.S.A.
FT4J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20141125202446
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................12
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Installing Child Seats.....................................16
Booster Seats..................................................24
Child Seat Positioning..................................26
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................29
Fastening the Safety Belts.........................30
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................34
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................34
Safety Belt Minder.........................................35
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................36
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................37
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................38
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................39
Front Passenger Sensing System............40
Side Airbags.....................................................42
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........43
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......45
Airbag Disposal..............................................46
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................47
Remote Control...............................................47
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................54
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................55
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................58
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
Locks
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Manual Liftgate..............................................64
Power Liftgate.................................................65
Keyless Entry...................................................68
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................71
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................73
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................74
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................74
1
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Audio Control...................................................75
Audio Control...................................................76
Voice Control....................................................76
Cruise Control..................................................76
Information Display Control........................77
Heated Steering Wheel................................77
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................78
Autowipers........................................................78
Windshield Washers.....................................79
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........80
Lighting
General Information.......................................81
Lighting Control...............................................81
Autolamps........................................................82
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................83
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................83
Daytime Running Lamps.............................83
Automatic High Beam Control.................84
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Ambient Lighting............................................87
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................88
Global Opening..............................................88
Exterior Mirrors................................................89
Interior Mirror...................................................90
Sun Visors..........................................................91
Moonroof............................................................91
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................93
Warning Lamps and Indicators................95
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............98
Information Displays
General Information...................................100
Information Messages...............................109
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Manual Temperature
Control (EMTC).........................................124
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC).........................................126
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)/Sony Audio
System..........................................................127
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................129
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................131
Cabin Air Filter.................................................131
Remote Start...................................................131
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................133
Head Restraints.............................................133
Manual Seats.................................................135
Power Seats....................................................135
Memory Function..........................................137
Rear Seats.......................................................139
Heated Seats.................................................140
Climate Controlled Seats...........................141
Rear Seat Armrest........................................142
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............143
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................147
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................149
2
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Overhead Console.......................................149
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................150
Ignition Switch...............................................150
Keyless Starting - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start...............................................150
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................151
Engine Block Heater....................................154
Unique Driving Character-
istics
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................156
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions......................................158
Fuel Quality....................................................159
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................159
Running Out of Fuel....................................159
Refueling.........................................................160
Fuel Consumption........................................162
Emission Control System..........................163
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...........................166
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................170
Brakes
General Information.....................................175
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................175
Electric Parking Brake.................................176
Hill Start Assist..............................................178
Traction Control
Principle of Operation................................180
Using Traction Control...............................180
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................181
Using Stability Control................................182
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................183
Rear Parking Aid............................................183
Front Parking Aid..........................................184
Side Sensing System..................................185
Active Park Assist.........................................187
Rear View Camera.......................................193
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation................................196
Using Cruise Control...................................196
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................197
Driving Aids
Driver Alert.....................................................203
Lane Keeping System................................204
Blind Spot Information System.............208
Steering.............................................................212
Collision Warning System..........................212
Front View Camera......................................214
Drive Control...................................................215
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................217
Cargo Nets.......................................................217
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................217
Load Limit........................................................218
Towing
Towing a Trailer............................................226
Trailer Sway Control....................................227
Recommended Towing Weights............227
Essential Towing Checks..........................229
Transporting the Vehicle............................231
3
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F35...............................................................231
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55.................................................232
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................234
Economical Driving.....................................234
Cold Weather Precautions.......................234
Driving Through Water...............................234
Floor Mats.......................................................235
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................237
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................238
Fuel Shutoff...................................................238
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................239
Post-Crash Alert System...........................241
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............242
In California (U.S. Only).............................243
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................244
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................244
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................245
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................246
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)............................................................246
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................247
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart..........................248
Changing a Fuse...........................................257
Maintenance
General Information...................................258
Opening and Closing the Hood..............258
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................259
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™...............................................260
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................261
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................262
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L EcoBoost™/
3.5L...............................................................262
Engine Oil Check..........................................262
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................263
Engine Coolant Check...............................263
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.0L EcoBoost™......................................266
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.7L EcoBoost™/3.5L............................267
Brake Fluid Check........................................268
Power Steering Fluid Check....................269
Washer Fluid Check....................................269
Fuel Filter........................................................269
Changing the 12V Battery.........................269
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................271
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................272
Removing a Headlamp..............................274
Changing a Bulb...........................................274
Bulb Specification Chart...........................276
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................279
Cleaning Products.......................................279
Cleaning the Exterior..................................279
Waxing............................................................280
Cleaning the Engine...................................280
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................281
Cleaning the Interior....................................281
4
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................281
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................282
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283
Vehicle Storage............................................283
Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................286
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................288
Tire Care..........................................................294
Using Summer Tires.....................................311
Using Snow Chains.......................................311
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............312
Changing a Road Wheel............................315
Technical Specifications............................319
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................321
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................321
Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................322
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™......323
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™......324
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................325
Vehicle Identification Number................326
Vehicle Certification Label.......................326
Transmission Code Designation.............327
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................328
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................331
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L....335
Audio System
General Information...................................339
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC...........................................................340
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................343
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD..................................................................344
Digital Radio..................................................347
Satellite Radio..............................................349
Audio Input Jack...........................................352
USB Port..........................................................352
Media Hub......................................................353
SYNC™
General Information...................................354
Using Voice Recognition...........................356
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............358
SYNC™ Applications and Services......368
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................372
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................379
MyFord Touch™
General Information...................................388
Settings...........................................................397
Entertainment..............................................407
Phone...............................................................424
Information....................................................430
Climate............................................................439
Navigation......................................................442
Accessories
Accessories.....................................................451
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................453
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......455
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........458
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................461
5
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
it, the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 354).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
9
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 354).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 354).
10
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
11
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
12
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
WARNINGS
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for
St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 40).
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
16
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
Standard safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
17
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
18
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
19
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
20
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
21
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 20 inches
(51 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
22
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
be removed.
E193589
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
23
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
24
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
25
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
WARNINGS
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
26
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
133).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
27
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
28
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
29
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners
may also activate when a Safety Canopy
airbag is deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using the Sliding Clip (If Equipped)
E200788
Slide the clip away from the tongue so
there is no loose webbing when an
occupant or child seat is buckled up. You
can also use the sliding clip to raise the
tongue and prevent it from rattling or to
ease access to the tongue.
30
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
WARNINGS
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature
or any other safety belt function is not
operating properly when checked by an
authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both the vehicle sensitive locking mode
and the automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
31
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted
in the shoulder portion of the safety belts
of the second-row outboard seating
positions.
32
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the safety
belt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with
automatic locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will
function like standard restraints in
everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable safety belt system
must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
crashes and some side impact crashes and
rollovers. The fact that the rear inflatable
safety belt did not inflate in a crash does
not mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause
activation.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
33
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing
or on the retractor behind the trim. Also,
use the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when fully
extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E145664
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
34
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
35
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 279).
36
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage
sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
37
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
38
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 45).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
between an occupant’s chest and the
driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
39
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger’s seat and
safety belt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger’s frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E196510
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located at the top
center of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status
indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is
functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger's frontal airbag when a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
40
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, but the airbag off
indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF off light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
41
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seat back map
pocket
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 45).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat, or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is
interfering with the seat, take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light is no
longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
242).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
42
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 45).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
KNEE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Keep the glove box door closed while
driving for optimal performance of
the passenger knee airbag during a
crash.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the knee airbag.
A driver knee airbag is located under or
within the instrument panel. A passenger
knee airbag is located within the glove box
door. During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver and
passenger knee airbags based on crash
43
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
severity and occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
driver and passenger knee airbag may
deploy but the driver front airbag may not
activate. As with front and side airbags, it
is important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 45).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
WARNINGS
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
44
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 45).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags, the Safety Canopy and optional
rear inflatable safety belts. Based on the
type of crash (frontal impact or side
impact), the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
45
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners and optional rear
inflatable safety belts is to activate in
frontal, near-frontal and side crashes,
and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
46
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 47).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E151797
Press the button to release the key. Press
and hold the button to fold the key back
in when not in use.
47
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151795
Note: The keys that came with your vehicle
have a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E144506
Your intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E151796
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access
the key blade.
E151795
Note: The backup keys that came with your
vehicle have a security tag that provides
important vehicle key cut information. Keep
the tag in a safe place for future reference.
Using the Key Blade
The key cylinder is under a cap on the driver
door handle.
To remove the cap:
48
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151956
1. Insert the key blade into the slot on the
bottom of the handle and press up.
2. Applying upward pressure, move the
cap rearward to release it. Gently
remove the key while doing so.
To install the cap:
E151957
1. Place the cap just forward of the key
cylinder.
2. Applying pressure to the cap, move it
forward until it is in place. You may
hear a snap as it engages.
Make sure you have properly installed the
cap by trying to move it rearward.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
109).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key before
beginning the procedure.
E151798
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
49
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
50
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E153891
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 124). See
Information Displays (page 100). A
manual climate control system will run at
the setting it was set to when you switched
the vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system triggered.
• You disable the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
• The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback (If
Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
51
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful.
Solid green.
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off.
Solid red.
Remote start or
stop failed.
Blinking red.
Waiting for status
update.
Blinking green.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start will run
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. It can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Note: If you remote start the vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. With an intelligent access
transmitter, you must press the
START/STOP button on the instrument
panel once while applying the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during
the remote start and the radio will not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed
the duration to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes will begin after what is left of
the first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle
will continue to run now for a total of 15
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
vehicle and parking lamps will
turn off.
You may have to be closer to the vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 100).
52
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature
If programmed to a pre-set position, the
integrated keyhead transmitter or
intelligent access key recalls the driver seat
and exterior mirror positions when you
unlock your vehicle. It also recalls the
power steering column and pedal
positions. See Memory Function (page
137).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 71).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
53
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can
be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with
push-button start, when both a MyKey and
an admin remote transmitter are present,
the admin remote transmitter will be
recognized by the vehicle while switching
the vehicle on to start the vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Safety belt reminder. You cannot
disable this feature. The audio system
will mute when the front seat
passengers’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel
or low charge warning activates earlier,
giving the MyKey user more time to
refuel or recharge.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid
and Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS) with cross traffic alert.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if equipped on your vehicle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
54
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to switch
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assist, or the
do not disturb feature (if your vehicle
is equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, place the intelligent
access key fob into the backup slot. The
location of your backup slot is in another
chapter. See Starting and Stopping the
Engine (page 150).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or
the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select
Create MyKey.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see a message informing you to
label this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK
or > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a
feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 100).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
55
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
56
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 100).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
57
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 151).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
58
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 71).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
59
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim
illuminates when you lock the door. It
remains on for up to 10 minutes after you
switch the ignition off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch no longer
operates after 20 seconds. You must
unlock your vehicle with the remote control
or keyless keypad, or switch the ignition
on, to restore function to these switches.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 100).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
unlatches the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time. The luggage compartment release
button only operates when your vehicle's
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door unlock
mode only unlocks the driver door when
the unlock button is pressed once. All door
unlock mode unlocks all doors when the
unlock button is pressed once. The
unlocking mode applies to the remote
control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access. You can also change the
mode in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 100).
Reporgramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
The direction indicators flash twice to
confirm the change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
60
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment is
open, or if the hood is open on vehicles
with an anti-theft alarm or remote start,
the horn sounds twice and the direction
indicators do not flash. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 100).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage
compartment.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Locking the Doors
E112203
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors individually using
the key in the position shown.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Unlocking the Doors
If the central locking function fails to
operate, unlock the driver door and then
unlock all other doors individually by
pulling the interior door handles.
Note: If the doors have been unlocked using
this method, the doors must be locked
individually until the central locking function
has been repaired.
61
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3.3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Make sure not to touch the
lock sensor area on the front of the handle.
E157085
Touch the top of the door handle to lock
your vehicle. There will be a brief delay
before you can unlock your vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
At the Luggage Compartment
E138632
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors lock then unlock and
the horn sounds twice if the key is still in
the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition. To do this, use the keyless
entry keypad with the driver door closed,
or press the lock button on the transmitter
even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key in
the passenger compartment after you
close the last door. If the system finds a
key, all of the doors immediately unlock
and the horn sounds twice, indicating that
a key is inside.
62
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your
vehicle after you have closed all the doors
by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the
handle with another intelligent access
key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle locks and
the alarm arms. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 100).
Autolock
The autolock feature locks all the doors
when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle's sped is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle's speed
is less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
The autounlock feature unlocks all the
doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle's speed is
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
• You stop your vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
Note: You can switch autounlock and
autolock on or off independently of each
other.
You can switch these features on or off in
the information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
63
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed,
you switch the ignition off and you remove
the key from the ignition.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You insert the key in the ignition
(integrated keyhead transmitter only).
• You press the START/STOP button
(intelligent access key only).
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on, it
shuts off once it detects a certain amount
of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
MANUAL LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E138632
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
64
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to play near an
open or moving power liftgate.
Note: Cycling the ignition while the liftgate
is power closing and is near the latch may
cause the liftgate to reverse to full open
position. Make sure that you close the
liftgate before operating or moving the
vehicle, especially in an enclosure, like a
garage or a parking structure. You could
damage the liftgate or its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the spoiler, glass or liftgate.
This could damage the liftgate and its
components.
If your vehicle is running, the liftgate only
operates with the transmission in park (P).
One warning tone sounds as the liftgate
begins to power close. Three short chimes
indicate a problem with the open or close
request, caused by:
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate falls to the closed direction
after the liftgate has stopped in the open
position, ten short warning chimes indicate
excessive weight on the gate or a possible
gas strut failure. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer if you still have the
issue after you remove the load.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
65
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Note: You can stop the liftgate movement
direction with a second press of the
instrument panel button or the control
button on the liftgate, a double press of the
transmitter button, or by using a kicking
motion with your foot for hands-free
liftgates.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3.3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate.
E174120
1. Move your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion. Do not move your foot
sideways or the sensors may not detect
the motion.
2. The liftgate powers open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stops the power
operation.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access transmitter away from the
rear bumper detection area while washing
your car.
66
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
With the Outside Control Button
Opening
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the
liftgate unlocks when you press the
liftgate release button.
E138632
2. Press the control button located in the
top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate after pressing the control. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate
the system’ s obstacle detection feature and
stops the power operation.
Closing
E138636
Press and release the button.
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Manually move the liftgate to the
desired height.
3. Press and hold the control button on
the liftgate until you hear a chime,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
full-open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Two short tones sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
67
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the
liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the
following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Release the liftgate.
• Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
If your vehicle is fitted with MyFord Touch,
you can also program the system with a
personal entry code. See Settings (page
397).
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
68
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 do not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition on.
• You unlock your vehicle using
intelligent access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 simultaneously
with the driver door closed. You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
Unlocking the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you enable the
all-door unlocking mode. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 60).
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code, then press 3·4 within five
seconds.
To Release the Liftgate
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code, then press 5·6 within five
seconds.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You need to have two programmed
keys for this procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Intelligent Access Key
Note: You need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
69
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E195807
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E195808
2
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
first intelligent access key into the
backup slot inside the center console.
3. Press the START/STOP button once
and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the START/STOP button again
and remove the key.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
70
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting
problems, especially if they are too close to
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent
these objects from touching the coded key
when starting your vehicle. Switch the
ignition off, move all objects on the key
chain away from the coded key and restart
your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a coded key, it is not operating correctly. A
message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts your
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your coded keys are lost or stolen and
you do not have an extra coded key, you
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of
eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight
can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the vehicle
immobilizer keycode and the remote
control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. If
two previously programmed coded keys
are not available, contact an authorized
dealer.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
71
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Security
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 3 seconds,
but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After at least 3 seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least 6 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If you have successfully programmed the
new integrated keyhead transmitter, it will
start your vehicle and operate the remote
entry system.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat steps 1 through 8. If
programming remains unsuccessful,
contact an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access keys readily accessible.
If two previously programmed coded keys
are not available, contact an authorized
dealer.
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before
beginning and that they remain closed
throughout the procedure. Carry out all
steps within 30 seconds of starting the
sequence. Stop and wait for at least one
minute before starting again if you carry
out any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E195807
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E195808
2
72
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Security
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
intelligent access key into the backup
slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key
in the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If
programming remains unsuccessful,
contact an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
73
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 133).
E191039
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E191047
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 133).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
74
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again. The steering column may begin
to move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 137).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to allow extra
room to exit your vehicle. The column will
return to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
100).
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
Operate the following functions with the
control:
E168191
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Mute.C
Media.D
Seek down or previous.E
Seek up or next.F
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• seek through a track.
75
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E196496
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Mute.C
Seek down or previous.D
Seek up or next.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E168194
Press the button to select or deselect voice
control. See SYNC™ (page 354).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E191246
76
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type 2
E191247
See Cruise Control (page 196).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E144636
See Information Displays (page 100).
Information Display Control
Features
E144811
This control functions the same as the
center control on the faceplate. See Audio
Unit (page 343).
Use this control to adjust the right side of
the information display. Navigate through
the screen and press OK to select.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See MyFord Touch™ (page 388).
77
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
D
C
B
E169313
A
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
C
B
A
E169314
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically
when the rain sensor activates the
windshield wipers continuously.
78
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the
following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
A
C
B
E169315
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You will find it in the area around the
interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors
the amount of moisture on the windshield
and automatically turns on the wipers. It
will adjust the wiper speed by the amount
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is
automatically set to on and remains on until
you switch it off in the information display.
You can also switch the feature back on at
any time. See Autowipers (page 78).
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. Set the
control to low sensitivity, and the wipers
will turn on when the rain sensor detects
a large amount of moisture on the
windshield. Set the control to high
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting
adjusts the wiper speed according to the
moisture on the windshield only. Use the
wiper lever to wipe the windshield
on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E169316
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
79
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer
fluid. This feature can be switched on or
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 100).
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer will also
operate the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper and ignition off before using
an automatic car wash.
A
B
C
E171615
Intermittent wipe.A
Low speed wipe.B
Off.C
Press the top of the button to switch
intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the
button again to switch low speed wipe on.
Press the bottom of the button to switch
the rear window wiper off.
When you switch on the front wipers and
move the gearshift lever to reverse (R),
rear intermittent wipe automatically turns
on.
Rear Window Washer
E167407
Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer. When you release
the lever, wiping continues for a short
period of time.
80
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
81
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E162680
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 100).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
82
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
A B
E165366
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to brighten.
B
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 100).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 100).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
83
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control
of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of
the camera for a blockage. A clear view of
the road is required for proper system
operation. Have any windshield damage in
the area of the camera’s field-of-view
repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system will go into low beam
mode until you clear the blockage. A
message may also appear in the instrument
cluster display noting the front camera is
blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system . However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start
up. If you want to change the beam state
independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
multifunction switch. Automatic control will
resume when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will switch on if:
• the ambient light level is low enough
• there is no traffic in front of the vehicle
• the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 24 mph (39 km/h)
The high beams will switch off if:
• the system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the tail
lamps of a preceding vehicle.
• vehicle speed falls below
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h)
• the ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required
• the system detects severe rain, snow
or fog
• the camera is blocked
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 100). See Autolamps
(page 82).
84
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Manually Overriding the System
E169254
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps
to headlamps.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E169255
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will turn on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on
the front interior lamp.
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp buttons are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each button on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, moonroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
85
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will light amber when the
door function is off. When the door function
is off and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps will stay off. Press the button
again to switch the door function back on.
The indicator lamp will light blue when the
door function is on. When the door function
is on and you open a door, the courtesy and
door lamps will light.
Type 1
E167127
A
B C D
D
All lamps on buttonA
Door function buttonB
All lamps off buttonC
Individual dome lampsD
Type 2
E192153
D D
CA
B
All lamps on buttonA
Door function buttonB
All lamps off buttonC
Individual dome lampsD
86
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Type 3
E199032
C C
A
B
Door function buttonA
All lamps on buttonB
Individual dome lampsC
You can switch individual map lamps on
independently by pressing a map lens.
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
Type 1
E169470
Type 2
E199026
Type 3
E199027
You can switch dome lamps on by pressing
the button.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
The ambient lighting system is adjusted
with the touchscreen system. See MyFord
Touch™ (page 388).
87
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
1. Lift and hold the control until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the control.
3. Open the window and then try to close
it automatically.
4. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close automatically.
Note: The one-touch down and one-touch
up feature only applies to the front
windows.
Bounce-Back
The window stops automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window is fully closed.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display, or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 100).
88
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can open the windows for a short time
after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
Note: Only the front windows are operated
during global opening.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
131).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 137).
Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
89
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 208).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
90
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open. Press and
release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.
A
Moonroof vent. Press and
release to vent the moonroof.
B
91
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
C
closed. Note: The sunshade
stops short of its fully opened
position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the
sunshade fully, press the control
again.
Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
D
Moonroof close. Press and
release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent
positions.
E
Note: The moonroof stops 8 in (200 mm)
from the closed position. To close the
moonroof, press and hold the moonroof
close control until the moonroof is in the
fully closed position.
92
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1
E144485
TachometerA
Information DisplayB
SpeedometerC
Fuel GaugeD
Engine Coolant Temperature GaugeE
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Compass
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 100).
93
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 100).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle remains in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been resolved.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
• It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.
Variations:
Distance-to-emptyFuel gauge positionDriving type (fuel economy
conditions)
35 miles to 80 miles (56 km
to 129 km)
1/16thHighway driving
35 miles (56km)1/16thSevere duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)
94
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 2
E144486
Left Information DisplayA
SpeedometerB
Right Information Display See General Information (page 100).C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 100).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 100).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
95
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 197).
On (white light): Illuminates when you turn
the adaptive cruise control system on.
Turns off when you turn the speed control
system off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system
engages. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have normal braking (without Anti-lock
braking system) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 208).
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that you do not have the parking brake
engaged. If you do not have the parking
brake engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction.
Have the system checked immediately by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you turn the
left or right direction indicator or
the hazard warning flasher on. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb. See Changing a
Bulb (page 274).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
96
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash when
the electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 176).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 262).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 35).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
97
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system has
detected a powertrain or an
all-wheel drive fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of your vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 163).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
When you first switch the ignition on,
before engine start, the service engine soon
indicator light illuminates to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for inspection maintenance testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until you crank the engine, and then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that your vehicle is not ready for
inspection maintenance testing. See
Emission Control System (page 163).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 182).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off. See Using Stability Control (page
182).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
98
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
99
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Your vehicle may or may not be
equipped with all the messages listed in this
chapter. Your vehicle will not display
messages of systems it is not equipped with.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)
E144637
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedo
Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
100
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 and 2
Average Fuel
Outside Temperature
All Values
• Digital Speedo - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
• Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle.
• Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Outside Temperature — Shows the outside air temperature.
• All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel.
Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and fuel information.
Fuel Economy
Distance to Empty
Inst Fuel Econ
Avg MPG
Long Term Fuel Economy
AVerage Speed
Fuel History
Average Fuel
101
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
All Values
Auto StartStop
• Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
• Inst Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along
with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset.
• Long Term Fuel Economy - Shows your long term fuel economy.
• Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• All Values — Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel).
• Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 109).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert or Driver Alert DisplayDriver Alert
Sport, Normal or ComfortDriver Select Suspension
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Intelligent AWD
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping System
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
102
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire PressureTire Monitor
Trailer Sway - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Pressure
E194202
Displays your current vehicle tire pressures.
Settings
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicle
Normal or TowingDTE
Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp delayLighting
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Relock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote Unlock
Switches inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
oil Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Rest
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start
Automatic or OffDriver Seat or Seats
and Wheel
103
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Remote Open or Remote CloseWindows
Courtesy Wipe or Rain SensingWipers
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911
Assist
On or OffDo Not
Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction
Control
Choose desired speed or OffMAX
Speed
Choose desired speed or OffSpeed
Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay
Setup
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
psi, kPa or barTire Pres-
sure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
104
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 2)
E144638
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
• Display Mode
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
Display Mode
Use the up/down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Option 4Option 3Option 2Option 1Display mode
--XXXXX mi (km) to empty
XX--Round tachometer
--X-Vertical tachometer
Tire Pressure on demand screen
Digital Speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h
Intelligent AWD - AWD Gauge
• XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows the approximate distance the vehicle will travel.
• Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with
your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine.
During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear
will appear in the display.
105
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Trip 1 and 2
All Values
All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
• Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance.
• Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you
restart your vehicle.
• Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left
hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Use the left and right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
Average Speed - Hold OK to Reset
Auto StartStop
• Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average
fuel economy and distance to empty.
• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average
fuel economy and distance to empty.
• Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
• Auto StartStop - available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what
is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 109).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
106
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Sport or NormalSteering in DAdaptive Steering
Sport or NormalSteering in S
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert or Driver Alert DisplayDriver Alert
Sport, Normal or ComfortDriver Select Suspension
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping System
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire Monitor - Hold OK to ResetTire Monitor
Tire Pressure
E194203
Displays your current vehicle tire pressures.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
107
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicle
Normal or TowingDTE
Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive Headlamps - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Adaptive HeadlampsLighting
Right or Left
Hand Traffic
Traffic Set Up
Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Relock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or Driver FirstRemote Unlock
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirrors
XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Rest
Park Lock Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Enable or Disable SwitchPower
Liftgate
Auto or Last settingClimate ControlRemote
Start
Auto or OffSeats or Seats and
Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Seatbelts
108
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Remote Open or Remote CloseWindows
Courtesy Wipe or Rain SensingWipers
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911
Assist
On or OffDo Not
Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction
Control
Choose desired speed or OffMAX
Speed
Choose desired speed or OffSpeed
Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay
Setup
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge
Display
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemper-
ature
psi, kPa or barTire Pres-
sure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
109
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
E144636
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
197).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
197).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
197).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
110
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission into a
lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
Airbag
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.
Remove blockage.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 73).
Vehicle Alarm to Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Alarm fault Service required
111
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
All-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating.
AWD Temporarily
Disabled
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect
itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare
tire.
AWD Off
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and
clear this message after driving a short distance with the road
tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer.
AWD Malfunction
Service Required
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off for Fuel
Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
Automatic High Beam Control
ActionMessage
The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the
windshield.
Front camera low visibility
Clean screen
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Front camera fault Service
required
The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a short
period of time for the sensor to cool down.
Front camera temporarily
not available
112
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Auto Start-Stop
ActionMessage
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to
start.
Auto StartStop Press
Brake to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder
to start.
Auto StartStop Press
Brake Harder to Activate
The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.Auto StartStop Press
Any Pedal
Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Select
Neutral To Start Engine
Select park for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Shift to
P Restart Engine
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.Auto StartStop Manual
Restart Required
Conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to
function properly.
Auto StartStop Not
Available
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save
Battery
113
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 208).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 208).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 208).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The door listed is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The door listed is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar
The door listed is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar
The door listed is not completely closed.Liftgate Or Liftglass Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood open
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
The factory keypad code displays in the information display
after system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 71).
Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
114
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Electronic Stability Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.ESC Service required
The traction control system status.ESC off
The traction control system status.ESC on
The traction control system status.ESC Sport mode
Engine
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop
your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 263).
High engine temperature
Stop safely
Engine service is required. See an authorized dealer.Engine fault Service now
Check the engine oil level See Engine Oil Check (page
262).
Engine oil level low Check
level
115
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.Fuel Door Opening
The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin
to refuel.
Fuel Door Open
A reminder to close the fuel door.Close Fuel Door
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 178).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Keyless Entry
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.Press Brake to START
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 150).
No Key Detected
You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
116
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Informs you that they you are exiting your vehicle and the
engine is on.
Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 262).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 262).Engine oil change due
Service now
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
117
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtem-
perature
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine
temperature.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey Not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle
speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
118
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Front Parking Aid (page
184).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Front Parking Aid (page
184).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you
have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
The electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it.Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it
and your vehicle is moving.
Press Brake To Release
Park Brake and Switch
119
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
You have not released the electric parking brake causing it to
overheat.
Park Brake System
Overheated
The electric parking brake is set and you have started your
vehicle.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
You have released the electric parking brake.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Pre-Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Pre-Collision Warning
Malfunction
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page
212).
Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available
120
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory X Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .Press Brake to Start
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 312).
LOW Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 312).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 312). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
121
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
ActionMessage
Your trailer sway control has detected trailer sway so you
need to reduce your speed.
Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
Traction Control
ActionMessage
The status of the traction control system. See Using Traction
Control (page 180).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system. See Using Traction
Control (page 180).
Traction Control On
Transmission
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-
tion Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as possible.
Transmission Overtem-
perature Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in
a safe place as soon as possible.
Transmission Over-
heating Stop Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.
See Automatic Transmission (page 166).
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before
you drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park
A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the trans-
mission.
Press Brake Pedal
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
122
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt
Mode
The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup On
The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup Off
123
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: ELECTRONIC
MANUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EMTC)
E188680
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
B
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates on when the system is on.
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
C
MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to turn on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
D
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
124
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on,
and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
F
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 140).
G
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 131).
H
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
I
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
J
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
125
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: DUAL
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC)
E198814
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger
side.
C
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 140).
E
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
126
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
G
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
H
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
I
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 131).
J
MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
K
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
DUAL AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(DATC)/SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Information Displays (page 100).
127
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
E198947
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
A
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the
air conditioning with the A/C button.
MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
B
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
C
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D
128
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 140).
E
Climate controlled seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the
climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page
141).
F
Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature on the passenger
side.
G
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.H
Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side.
I
MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
J
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 131).
K
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
AUTO: Press the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing and
holding the button for more than two seconds.
M
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
129
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort
in hot weather, drive with the windows
slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start-up
or until your vehicle airs out.
In mild weather, you can improve your fuel
economy when using the climate control
system by using outside air instead of air
conditioning.
• Turn the temperature control knob(s)
so the interior temperature is set to
60°F (15.5°C).
• Set the air distribution to panel or floor
(or both).
• Press A/C to turn the air conditioning
off.
• Press the recirculated air button so
fresh air enters the vehicle.
• Press the small fan button until the fan
is at its lowest setting.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for
Heating
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Press the MAX A/C button.
Recommended Settings for
Cooling
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost and panel buttons.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to
maintain comfort. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel air
vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase the airflow to the outer
instrument panel vents, close the air
vents in the middle of the instrument
panel and in the rear of the center
console.
130
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear
window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 455).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 100).
131
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
132
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
133
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat and rear seat outboard head
restraints
E138642
Rear center head restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
134
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
The driver and passenger manual seats
may consist of:
A B C D
E144631
A bar to move the seat backward
and forward.
A
A control to adjust the lumbar of
the seatback (driver seat only).
B
A lever to adjust the height of the
seat (driver seat only).
C
A lever to adjust the angle of the
seatback.
D
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
Note: Driver seat shown, passenger seat
similar.
135
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
6-way power seat
E176793
136
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
10-way power seat
E196499
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E165608
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the driver seat, power mirrors
and optional power steering column. The
memory control is located on the driver
door.
137
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors, and
steering column to your desired
position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat, mirrors, and steering
column move to the position stored for
that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position can only be recalled when the
ignition is off, or when the transmission is in
park (P) or neutral (N) (and your vehicle is
not moving) if the ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
60).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control - power seat, mirror or
steering column switch (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
will sound after about two seconds.
Continue holding until a second tone
is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
138
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to two inches
(five centimeters) when you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 100).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
WARNING
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that
the safety belts are not buckled
when folding the seatback.
E186789
Folding the Seatback
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to
fold the seatback forward.
Unfolding the Seatback
Rotate the seatback upward until the
seatback latches in the upright position.
The seatback will click when it is locked
into position.
Reclining the Seatback
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up
to recline the seatback.
Easy Fold™ Folding Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING
Make sure that the seat is
unoccupied when folding it down.
Folding the seat while occupied
could result in damage to the seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational
when the vehicle is in park (P) and the
liftgate has been open for less than 10
minutes.
The controls are located on the left-hand
rear quarter trim panel (accessible from
the liftgate area).
E190965
Folding the Seatback
Press and hold the top control to lower the
left seatback. Press and hold the bottom
control to lower the right seatback.
Unfolding the Seatback
Rotate the seatback up until the seatback
latches in the upright position. The
seatback will click when it is locked into
position.
139
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
140
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated,
they will turn off automatically when you
turn the engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Touch the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature turns
itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not needed.
141
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
142
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’ s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-vehicle programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the HomeLink
button you want to program.
143
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for five seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. See
Programming your garage door motor
later in this section.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. Do the following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while
you press and release the hand-held
transmitter button every 2 seconds. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts
the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button,
begin programming your garage door
opener motor.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming your garage door opener
motor
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
144
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
145
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
146
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use
of the lighter can cause damage not
covered by your warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will discharge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
discharging accidentally:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the console.
• In the cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so my cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
power point.
E143941
You can use the power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center
console.
When the indicator light, located on the
power point, is:
• on — power point is ready to supply
power.
• off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
• flashing — power point is in fault mode.
147
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
The power point temporarily turns off
power if it exceeds the 150 watt limit. It can
also switch to a fault mode if it detects
overloading, overheating, or shorting
conditions. For overloading and shorting
conditions, unplug your device and switch
the ignition off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off first.
Switch the ignition off then on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators
• Measuring devices which process
precise data, for example medical
equipment or measuring equipment
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply, for
example microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets or touch sensor lamps
148
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or collisions, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
A
B
F
C
D
E
E190439
Auxiliary power point (if
equipped).
A
Storage compartment with
auxiliary input jack, media hub,
and optional USB port.
B
Cupholder.C
Storage tray.D
Auxiliary power point with power
inverter or cigar lighter (if
equipped).
E
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point.
F
Note: Depending on your vehicle, auxiliary
power point locations could be in locations
A or B.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
smoker's package, auxiliary power points in
locations B and E could be replaced with a
cigar lighter.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
149
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
E72128
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
150
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E146431
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission), and then press the
button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when the ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine 3 times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited
to a 15-second engine cranking time. You
need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral.
• Switch the ignition key to position II.
For vehicles with keyless ignition, see
the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal. For
vehicles with manual transmission,
fully depress both the clutch and brake
pedals.
2. Turn the key to position III to start the
engine. Release the key when the
engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine after
the first attempt, wait for a short period and
try again.
151
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E195807
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E195808
2
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
intelligent access key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then the power button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 10 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 10 seconds of switching your vehicle
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 10
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
152
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, fully depress the brake
pedal. For vehicles with manual
transmission, fully depress the clutch
pedal and apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral.
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully
depressed and press the push button
ignition switch until the engine starts.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before the engine
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
the engine has shut down in order to save
fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Reset the timer by pressing the brake
or accelerator pedal.
• Temporarily switch off the shutdown
feature during the current ignition cycle
using the information display. See
(page 100).
• Press OK or RESET to temporarily
switch the feature off during the
current ignition cycle.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P). For
vehicles with a manual transmission,
shift into first gear.
2. Turn the key to position 0.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
153
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) for vehicles with
automatic transmission, or first gear
for vehicles with manual transmission
and switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N)
and use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) for vehicles with
automatic transmission, or first gear
for vehicles with manual transmission.
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press
it three times within two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
154
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
155
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine will restart automatically when
you release the brake pedal. In some
situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort
• To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
WARNINGS
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system.
Switch the ignition off before
opening the hood or performing any
maintenance. Failure to do so may
result in serious injuries due to automatic
engine restart.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have turned the engine off, but
the ignition will still be on and automatic
restart may occur.
The Auto StartStop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
100).
Enabling Auto StartStop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
• The Auto StartStop button is not
pressed (not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (4 km/h) after the vehicle has
been initially started.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive (D).
• The driver's door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable
level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• The steering wheel is not turned rapidly
or is not at a sharp angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Elevation is below approximately
10000 feet (3048 meters).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
Note: The system allows multiple
successive Auto StartStop events, but it
may not operate in conditions of heavy
traffic or in extended low speed operation.
Note: The green Auto StartStop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
Note: If the instrument cluster
is equipped with a grey Auto
StartStop indicator light, it is
illuminated when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
156
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
• You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• The transmission is moved from drive
(D).
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
• When you press the Auto StartStop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
• The blower fan speed is increased or
the climate control temperature is
changed.
• An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
Disabling Auto StartStop
P
R
N
D
S
E146362
Press the Auto StartStop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. The system
will only be deactivated for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto StartStop function.
If your vehicle is in an Auto StartStop state
and you shift the transmission to reverse
while the brake is not depressed, a
message telling you to press the brake will
appear. You must press the brake pedal
within 10 seconds, or a shift to park and a
manual restart will be required.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber Auto
StartStop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. The
vehicle must be restarted manually. See
Information Displays (page 100).
157
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“ Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.
158
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a minimum pump octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87. Premium unleaded gasoline will
provide improved performance and is
recommended for severe duty usage, for
example a fully loaded vehicle.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
159
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 159).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.
E156223
2. Insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
160
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
E166527
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
E156032
Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler
nozzle higher while you insert the nozzle for
easier access.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully
into the fuel system to open both
doors. Leave the nozzle fully inserted
until you have stopped pumping fuel.
161
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E154765
Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler
nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the
vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release. The fuel door will
latch closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may
appear on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle,
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four
or more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
empty reserve varies and should not be
relied upon to increase driving range. When
refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge
indicates empty, you might not be able to
refuel the full amount of the advertised
capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel
tank is the amount of fuel that can be put
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty. The advertised capacity is the total
fuel tank size – it is the combined usable
capacity plus the empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
162
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,
fill the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
163
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 160).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
164
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
165
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and latch the gearshift in park (P).
Turn the ignition to the off position
and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
166
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the sport
(S) position.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and
returns to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear.
Note: The system stays in manual control
until you make another shift selection (for
example, drive [D]).
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
167
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 248).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
E155984
1. Remove the side panel on the right side
of the gearshift lever.
E155985
2. Locate the access hole.
E155983
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool)
into the access hole and press the lever
foreword while pulling the gearshift
lever out of the park (P) position and
into the neutral (N) position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
panel.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
168
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
169
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an AWD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 109). An AWD system fault
will cause the AWD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the AWD system
has overheated See Information
Messages (page 109). This condition may
occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such
as deep sand. To resume normal AWD
function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal AWD
function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD
system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components. This
condition will be indicated by a warning in
the information display See Information
Messages (page 109). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should
turn off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling the
ignition off and on. It is recommended to
reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire
as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire
sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
170
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is in
P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the
steering wheel only as rapidly and as
far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a
maneuver (steering, acceleration or
braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
171
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep
sand. This will cause the AWD system to
overheat. After the system has cooled
down, normal AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, the axle lubricant and AWD PTU
(Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be
checked and changed if necessary.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
172
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
173
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 175). for
more information on the operation of the
anti-lock brake system (ABS).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
174
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 283).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 95).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
175
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located in the center console.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission in park (P) (automatic
transmission) or in first gear (1) or reverse
(R) (manual transmission).
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a
Manual Transmission)
If you park your vehicle facing uphill, move
the transmission to first gear (1) and turn
the steering wheel away from the curb. If
you park your vehicle facing downhill, move
the transmission to reverse (R) and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
Applying the Electric Parking
brake
WARNING
If the brake system warning lamp
flashes, there could be a problem
with your electric parking brake. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is
turned off after the electric parking brake
has been applied, or the electric parking
brake has been applied after the ignition has
been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E147230
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
The brake system warning lamp flashes
for approximately 2 seconds then stays
illuminated to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 100).
Apply the electric parking brake when
the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use
the electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
176
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
WARNINGS
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked),
do not apply the electric parking brake
while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or
poor road surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Information
Displays (page 100).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as
long as the switch is pulled. Releasing or
pressing the switch or pressing the
accelerator pedal will stop the braking
force.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
E147231
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after
you have released the parking brake,
there could be a problem with you braking
system. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by:
1. Turning the ignition on.
2. Pressing the brake pedal.
3. Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn
off.
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if all of the following
conditions exist:
• The driver door is closed.
• The driver safety belt is fastened.
• The vehicle is accelerated.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: On manual transmission vehicles, if
the transmission is in neutral (N) when you
release the clutch pedal and press the
accelerator pedal, the electric parking brake
will release automatically.
177
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Note: On manual transmission vehicles,
you must fully press the clutch pedal before
the drive away release feature will operate.
Drive as normal using the accelerator and
clutch pedals and the electric parking brake
will be automatically released.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake
has been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To
assure drive away release when starting
uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the slope and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a
slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See
Electric Parking Brake (page 176).
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) when
facing downhill and first gear (1) when
facing uphill.
178
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on. You can
switch the system on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 100). The system
remains off until you switch the ignition off.
Note: For vehicles with a manual
transmission, the system can be switched
on or off.
Note: For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the system cannot be
switched off.
179
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations for example, stuck in
snow or mud, turning the traction control
off may be beneficial as this allows the
wheels to spin with full engine power.
Depending on the type of system you have
on your vehicle, you can either turn the
system off using the information display
or by pressing the button.
Switching the System Off Using
the Information Display Controls
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle comes with this feature
already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
display controls. See General
Information (page 100).
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The button is located in the instrument
panel.
Press the button. You will see a message
in conjunction with an illuminated icon in
the display. Press the button again to
return the system to normal mode.
When you switch the traction control
system off, stability control remains fully
active.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected within
the AdvanceTrac system, the
stability control light will illuminate
steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac
system was not manually disabled through
the information display. If the stability
control light still illuminates steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you turn the traction control system
off.
When you turn the traction control system
off or on, a message appears in the
information display showing system status.
180
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the AdvanceTrac
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the
vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac
system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability
Control system helps you keep control of
your vehicle when on a slippery surface.
The electronic stability control portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral
slides, curve control assists in vehicle
handling in following the road during
adverse maneuvering, roll stability control
helps avoid a vehicle rollover, and the
traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction. See Using
Traction Control (page 180).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
with RSC skidding off its
intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with
RSC maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
B
181
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
with RSC system cannot be completely
turned off, but the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in reverse (R). You can also
turn off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 180).
182
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 100).
Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you
can use the parking aid switch to switch the
system off.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 109).
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
183
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
184
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph
(12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles that are near to the sides of your
vehicle.
Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.
The side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As the object comes
closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate
of the audible warning increases. The rate
of the audible warning varies depending
on whether the obstacle is inside or outside
of the driving path of your vehicle.
185
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible and visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving and obstacles are detected within
12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are
detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and
are inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
indication when your vehicle is moving at
7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles
are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when
obstacles are detected within 12–24 in
(30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle
the audible warning stops after 2 seconds
and the visual distance indication stops
after 4 seconds.
Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in
(30 cm) visual distance indication remains
on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system only provides visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for
example when moving on a slope, and
obstacles are detected within 12 in
(30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the
visual distance indication stops after 4
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks will not
be present.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control
system off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
• The traction control system is
activated.
186
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the
active park assist button.
The system detects an available parallel
or perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system.
Park Out Assist automatically steers your
vehicle out of a parallel parking space
(hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
enter traffic.
Note: The blindspot information system
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• You use a unauthorized tire size.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
• The weather conditions are poor
(heavy rain, snow, fog, etc).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object
(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear
of your vehicle or close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side
sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel
Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack once.
187
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.
A
E130107
Note: If the direction indicators are not
used, the system defaults to the passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system passively searches for
parking spaces prior to pressing the button,
so activating the system is still possible
while passing a parking space.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
street furniture and other items. You must
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) to the other vehicles while
passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
188
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist -
Perpendicular Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack twice.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching
either to the left-hand side or right-hand
side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
E186193
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
4.9 ft (1.5 m) to the other vehicles while
passing a parking space.
189
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
E186191
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Park Out
Assist
E146186
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your
vehicle you want to exit the parking space.
E188012
190
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The system determines the clearance to
the front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while
you control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it
guides you to take control of the steering
to complete the exit from the parking spot.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
flatbed truck).
Note: If the clearance in front of your
vehicle allows easy departure, the Park Out
Assist feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Active Park
Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
twice.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
191
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered senors
can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
192
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
193
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
194
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display
when the transmission is not in reverse (R):
Main Menu
Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
• 10 seconds of time elapse.
195
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or, when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
E191246
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
196
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
roadway.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or,
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select four gap settings.
E191247
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
E164805
The current gap setting and SET will also
appear.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. A green indicator light, current gap
setting and your desired set speed
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
5. A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if
there is a vehicle detected in front of
you.
197
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance.
The lead vehicle indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle will maintain a consistant gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The maximum
braking which the system applies is limited.
You can override the system by applying
the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E192116
A
B
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
You can decrease or increase the gap
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you by pressing the gap control.
198
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
E164805
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the graphic. Five gap settings are
available.
The gap setting is time dependent and the
distance automatically adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Adaptive cruise control gap settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
GapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press and release
the CNCL button. The last set speed does
not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, the system does not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the
information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed changes in 1 mph (1 km/h)
increments.
199
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h). An audible warning
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Press and release the OFF button when
the system is in stand by mode or switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
200
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. The driver should stay
alert and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for
correct operation.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with brake controls.
Aftermarket trailer brakes will not
function properly when you switch the
system on because the brakes are
electronically controlled. Failing to do so
may result in loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is located on the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
does not function when something
obstructs the radar signals.
201
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural environments.
A false blocked condition self clears or
clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display. See
Information Messages (page 109).
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking does not activate.
The system defaults to adaptive cruise
control when you start the vehicle.
202
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display will inform
the driver that the system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the system on and off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
When activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. At
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, it may issue another
warning that will remain in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK
on the steering wheel control to clear the
warning.
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 100).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness
is within a typical range.
203
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow to red.
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the
typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change
to grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
WARNINGS
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray can all
limit sensor performance.
Large contrasts in lighting can limit
sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
204
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
E144813
Press the button located on the
left steering wheel stalk to
switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 100). The
system stores the last-known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
A
B
A
B
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
205
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E151660
When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings will display in the information
display. If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, a separate white
icon will also appear or in some vehicles
arrows will display with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
206
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in
the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
207
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS™) with Cross Traffic Alert
(If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System aids
you in detecting vehicles that may have
entered the blind spot zone (A). The
detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the bumper. The system
alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the cross traffic alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross traffic alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor does it detect parked
vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure
(fences, guardrails or trees). It only alerts
you to vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind zone, typically fewer than
two seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the Systems
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h), it remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D) or neutral (N).
If shifted out of drive (D) or neutral (N),
the system enters cross traffic alert mode.
Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind
Spot Information System turns back on
when you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
Note: Cross traffic alert detects
approaching vehicles and bicycles from up
to 46 ft (14 m) away though coverage
decreases when the sensors are blocked.
Reversing slowly helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
208
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: For manual transmission vehicles,
the cross traffic alert will be active only if
the transmission is in reverse (R). If your
vehicle is rolling backward and the
transmission is not in reverse (R) then cross
traffic alert will not be active.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is
nearly maximized.
E142441
209
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information and cross
traffic alert systems illuminate a yellow
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. In addition, the
yellow alert indicator will flash if the
direction indicator is ON while a Blind Spot
Warning System alert is active.
Note: The alert indicator dims when the
system detects nighttime darkness.
Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of
tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left.
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing
a blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER
use the Blind Spot Information System as
a replacement for using the side and rear
view mirrors and looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement
for careful driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage warning.
A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
E142443
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or low visibility will
appear in the information display along
with a warning indicator. You can clear the
information display warning but the
warning indicator will remain illuminated.
When you remove a blockage, you can
reset the system in two ways:
• While driving, the system detects at
least two objects.
• You cycle the ignition from on to off
and then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle and driving in traffic, check again for
a blockage.
210
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in
front of the radar or remove
the obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for
a few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically
resets to an unblocked
state once the rainfall or
snowfall rate decreases or
stops. Do not use the Blind
Spot Information System or
cross traffic alert in these
conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall or
snowfall
interferes
with the
radar
signals
System Limitations
The Blind Spot Information and cross
traffic alert systems do have their
limitations; situations such as severe
weather conditions or debris build-up on
the sensor area may limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Blind Spot Information System:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a factory equipped
tow bar and it is towing a trailer, the sensors
will detect the trailer and turn the Blind Spot
Information and cross traffic alert systems
off to avoid false alerts. For non-factory
equipped tow bars, you may want to switch
the Blind Spot Information System off
manually.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by either the Blind Spot
Information or the cross traffic alert system
that illuminates the alert indicator with no
vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the Blind Spot
Information System telltale will illuminate
and a message will appear in the
information display.
All other system faults will display only
with a message in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 109).
Switching the Systems Off and On
You can temporarily switch off one or both
systems in the information display. See
General Information (page 100). When
you switch off the Blind Spot Information
System, you will not receive alerts and the
information display shows a system off
message.
Note: The cross traffic alert system always
turns on whenever the ignition is switched
on. However, the Blind Spot Information
System will remember the last selected on
or off setting.
211
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
You cannot switch one or both systems
off when MyKey is used. See Principle of
Operation (page 54).
You can also have one or both systems
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off, only an
authorized dealer can switch the system
back on.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
212
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
The Pre-Collision Assist system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace your judgment and the
need to maintain correct distance and
speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system is
active at speeds above approximately 5
mph (8 km/h).
E156130
The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
E156131
When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increases after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System
WARNING
The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
brake support reduces collision
speed only if you brake your vehicle
before any collision. As in any typical
braking situation, you must press your
brake pedal.
You can use your information display
control to adjust the warning system's
sensitivity to any one of three possible
settings. See General Information (page
100).
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
100).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
213
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the collision warning
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
ActionCause
Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
obstruction
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty
or obstructed
Wait a short time. The radar may take
several minutes to reset after you remove
the obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is
clean but the message remains in the
display
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air
interferes with the radar signals
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road
surface interferes with the radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
brake support only reduces collision
speed if you first apply your brakes.
You must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
FRONT VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNING
The front camera system is an aid
supplement device that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with
looking out your vehicle.
214
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E188845
The front view camera is located in the
grille.
Using the Front View Camera
The front view camera provides a video
image of the area in front of your vehicle.
To use the front view camera system,
place the transmission in any gear except
reverse (R). An image of the front of your
vehicle appears once you press the camera
enable button and your vehicle speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to your vehicle's orientation
or road condition.
Note: The front view camera will switch off
if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h). You will have to switch the
system back on by using the enable button
once below the speed threshold.
E188847
The camera button is located on
the audio unit.
Camera Views
Press the camera button to toggle
between different views.
• Front Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly in front of your
vehicle.
• Front Split View: Provides an extended
view of what is in front of your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the
camera button from the Front Normal
View screen.
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Driver Select Suspension
Driver select suspension delivers a unique
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering and
handling.
Driver select suspension consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock
absorbers stiffness in real time to
match the road surface and driver
inputs. This system continuously
monitors your vehicle’s motion (roll,
pitch, bounce), suspension position,
load, speed, road conditions, and
steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based
on your vehicle speed and your inputs.
You can configure which of the modes are
active when your vehicle is in (D) drive or
in (S) sport. The configuration remains
active until modified from the main menu
on the information display. See (page 100).
215
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Modes:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the
composure demanded from your
vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control. The engine responds more
directly to your inputs. Sport mode is
ideal for use during more spirited
driving.
Adaptive Steering
You can configure which of the modes are
active when your vehicle is in (D) drive or
in (S) sport. The configuration remains
active until modified from the main menu
on the information display. See (page 100).
Modes:
• Normal – Default factory setting.
• Sport – Slightly higher effort required
for steering with more road force felt
through the steering wheel.
Note: The Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the
system to ensure proper operation. Certain
types of system errors will gray out the
mode selections within the information
display, preventing you from changing states
when the gear position is changed. Other
types of errors will produce a temporary
message that states a malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
216
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
CARGO NETS
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
anchors provided. Repeat the attachment
on both sides of the vehicle.
E199571
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is 145 lb
(65 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
217
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
218
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E142516
219
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E142517
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
220
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Example only:
E142523
221
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
222
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
223
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
224
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
225
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have
electrical items, such as fuses or
relays, related to towing. See
Fuses (page 248).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in the Load Carrying
chapter. See Load Limit (page
218).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
226
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 217).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) for
vehicles without towing package,
or 30 ft² (2.79 m²) for vehicles with
towing package.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (305 m) starting
at the 1,000 ft (305 m) elevation
point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’ s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
227
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum trailer weight
1
Powertrain
1,500 lb (680 kg)
2.0L GTDI
2
3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
2.0L GTDI
3
2,000 lb (907 kg)
2.7L GTDI
2
2,000 lb (907 kg)
3.5L TiVCT
2
3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
3.5L TiVCT
3
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
Vehicle without towing package.
3
Vehicle with towing package.
228
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe
towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 218).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains
to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
229
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing-up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P (automatic
transmission) or neutral (manual
transmission) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P or manual transmission in a
low gear.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting drivability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
230
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 6-SPEED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- 6F35
Emergency Towing
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
231
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
166).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 124).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
2.0L EcoBoost vehicles with automatic
transmission (6F35) CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
We recommend you tow your vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground by using a
tow dolly, or with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If
you are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
We recommend you tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground using a
vehicle transport trailer. Otherwise, you
cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 6-SPEED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- 6F50/6F55
Emergency Towing
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
166).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 124).
232
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
You can tow your 2.7L EcoBoost or 3.5L
(6F50 or 6F55) equipped vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 150).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 269).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
all-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
233
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15%
less fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121
kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400
lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
234
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
235
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
236
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.
237
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to
the coverage section of your warranty
guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered
services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to
vehicles involved in cross-country driving,
logging, autocross and any other form of
off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to
the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm
if you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call the Ford Roadside Assistance at
1-800-665-2006 for additional
information.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
238
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission may
cause transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch. Turn all
accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
239
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a
ground connection point if available.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface or connecting
point, if available.
240
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started
and the jumper cables removed, allow it
to idle for several minutes so the battery
can recharge.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
241
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
242
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
243
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
244
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
245
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
246
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
247
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 269).
E190797
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).
30A
3
1
Starter relay.—2
Rear wiper.
15A
1
3
Rain sensor
248
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Blower motor relay.—4
Power point 3 - back of console.
20A
3
5
Not used.—6
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
1.
20A
1
7
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
2.
20A
1
8
Powertrain control module relay.—9
Power point 1 - driver front.
20A
3
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
4.
15A
2
11
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
3.
15A
2
12
Not used.—13
Not used.—14
Run-start relay.—15
Power point 2 - console bin.
20A
3
16
Power point 4 - luggage compartment.
20A
3
17
RH HID headlamp.
20A
1
18
Run-start electronic power assist steering.
10A
1
19
Run/start lighting.
10A
1
20
Transmission oil pump logic power (start/
stop).
15A
1
21
Air conditioner clutch solenoid.
10A
1
22
Run-start 6.
15A
1
23
Blind spot information system.
Rear view camera.
Adaptive cruise control.
Heads-up display.
249
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Voltage quality module (start/stop).
Front split view camera.
Front split view camera module.
Not used (spare).
10A
1
24
Run-start anti-lock brake system.
10A
2
25
Run-start powertrain control module.
10A
2
26
Not used.—27
Rear washer pump.
10A
1
28
Not used.—29
Not used.—30
Not used.—31
Electronic fan 1 relay.—32
A/C clutch relay.—33
Not used (spare).
15A
1
34
Not used.—35
Not used.—36
Power transfer unit fan.
10A
1
37
Electronic fan 2 relay—38
Electric fan 3 relay.—39
Horn relay.—40
Not used.—41
Fuel pump relay.—42
2nd row easy fold seat release.
10A
1
43
LH HID headlamp.
20A
1
44
Not used.—45
Not used.—46
250
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Not used.—49
Horn.
20A
1
50
Not used.—51
Not used.—52
Not used.—53
Brake on off switch.
10A
2
54
ALT sensor.
10A
2
55
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the
fuse box, do the following:
E145983
1. Release the two latches, located on
both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
251
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
3. Move the fuse box toward the center
of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
E190798
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—56
Not used.—57
Fuel pump feed.
30A
1
58
Electronic fan 3.
40A
2
59
Electronic fan 1.
40A
2
60
Not used.—61
Body control module 1.
50A
2
62
Electronic fan 2.
25A
1
63
Not used.—64
252
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Front heated seat.
20A
1
65
Not used.—66
Body control module 2.
50A
2
67
Heated rear window.
40A
1
68
Anti-lock brake system valves.
30A
1
69
Passenger seat.
30A
1
70
Not used.—71
Transmission oil pump (start/stop).
20A
1
72
Rear heated seats.
20A
1
73
Driver seat module.
30A
1
74
Wiper motor 1.
25A
1
75
Power lift-gate module.
30A
1
76
Climate control seat module.
30A
1
77
Trailer lighting module.
40A
1
78
Blower motor.
40A
2
79
Wiper motor 2.
25A
1
80
110 volt inverter.
40A
1
81
Not used.–82
Not used (spare).
20A
1
83
Starter solenoid.
30A
1
84
Not used.—85
253
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.–86
Anti-lock brake system pump.
60A
2
87
1
M-type fuse.
2
J-type fuse.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Demand lighting (glove box, vanity, dome).
10A
1
1
Battery saver relay coil.
254
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Second row easy fold relay coil.
Memory seats.
7.5A
1
2
Lumbar.
Power mirrors.
Driver seat module logic power.
Driver door unlock.
20A
1
3
Not used (spare).
5A
1
4
Not used (spare).
20A
1
5
Not used (spare).
10A
2
6
Not used (spare).
10A
2
7
Not used (spare).
10A
2
8
Not used (spare).
10A
2
9
Keypad.
5A
2
10
Power liftgate module logic power.
Hands free liftgate module.
Not used (spare).
5A
2
11
Climate control module.
7.5A
2
12
Cluster.
7.5A
2
13
Steering column control module.
Smart datalink connector (gateway)
module.
Not used (spare).
10A
2
14
Datalink power.
10A
2
15
Not used (spare).
15A
1
16
Not used (spare).
5A
2
17
Ignition switch.
5A
2
18
Push button start switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
255
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).
7.5A
2
19
Active front steering logic power.
7.5A
2
20
Humidity and in–car temperature sensor.
5A
2
21
Occupant classification sensor.
5A
2
22
Delayed accessory (power inverter logic,
moonroof logic, driver window switch
power).
10A
1
23
Central lock unlock.
20A
1
24
Driver door (window, mirror).
30A
1
25
Driver door module.
Driver door lock indicator.
Driver lock switch illumination.
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
30A
1
26
Front passenger door module.
Front passenger lock indicator.
Front passenger switch illumination
(window, lock).
Moonroof.
30A
1
27
Amplifier.
20A
1
28
Not used (spare).
30A
1
29
Not used (spare).
30A
1
30
Not used (spare).
15A
1
31
Global positioning system.
10A
1
32
Centerstack display.
Voice control (SYNC).
Radio transceiver module.
Radio.
20A
1
33
Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36,
37, circuit breaker 38).
30A
1
34
Restraints control module.
5A
1
35
256
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Auto-dimming rear view mirror.
15A
1
36
Heated seat.
Auto high beam/lane departure mirror
module.
Rear heated seat module logic power.
Heated steering wheel module (without
active front steering).
15A
1
37
Rear power windows.
30A
3
38
Rear window switch illumination.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
Circuit breaker.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. A
break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
257
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 455).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
258
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E191432
4
4. Open the hood. The hood strut
automatically supports the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
A
I H
EB
C
D
F
G
E188729
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).A
Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 262).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 262).D
Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).F
259
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 248).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).I
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
A
H EJFG
B
C
D
E188730
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).A
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).C
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 248).D
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).E
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 262).F
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 262).G
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).H
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 267).
J
260
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L
H EJFG
A
B
C
D
E188731
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 263).A
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 268).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 269).C
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 248).D
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 278).E
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 262).F
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 262).G
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 269).H
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 267).
J
261
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
E161560
A B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™/3.5L
A B
E169062
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off and
wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Maintenance (page
258).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
262
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Maintenance
(page 258).
3. Wipe off any spilled oil.
4. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Action and descriptionMessage
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
263
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 455).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
any color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded, nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained, the
system to be flushed, or the engine coolant
to be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty.
Use prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
264
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 321).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% decrease
the overheat protection characteristics
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted,
this feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The fail-safe distance
depends on outside temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge moves to the
red (hot) area and:
A high engine temperature
message appears in the
information display.
The service engine soon
indicator appears in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
265
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
If this occurs, your vehicle still operates.
However:
• The engine power becomes limited.
• The air conditioning system becomes
disabled.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature and the engine completely
shuts down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode. Drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine operates poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized
dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage. See
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 455). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked
if the transmission is not working properly,
(i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid
leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
266
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™/3.5L
WARNING
Do not use supplemental
transmission fluid additives,
treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in
damage to internal transmission
components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level
*
Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temprature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temprature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
E190273
A
B
MinimumA
MaximumB
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 261).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle.
An underfill conition can damage the
transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point A) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.
Note: An overfill conition can damage the
transmission.
267
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Adding Transmission Fluid
*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
*
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 335). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
*
Vehicles With 2.7L EcoBoost
WARNING
Do not run the engine with the air
filter disconnected.
E190367
x2
1. Remove the two air filter assembly
securing bolts.
2. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
4. Check the fluid level. See Checking
the Transmission Fluid Level.
5. Install in reverse order. Tighten the two
air filter assembly securing bolts until
you feel a strong resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
268
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E170684
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 321).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
269
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional
water during its life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
270
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into P.
3. Turn off all accessories.
4. Step on the brake pedal and start the
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 339). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 88).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 339).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, step on
the accelerator to start the engine.
7. While the engine is running, step on the
brake pedal and shift the transmission
to N.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 10 miles (16
kilometers) to completely relearn the
idle and fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
Note: It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected from
the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper
Blades (page 271). If that does not resolve
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Vehicle Care (page 279).
Service Position
E75184
Set the windshield wipers in the service
position to change the wiper blades. The
windshield wipers return to the starting
position when you switch the ignition on.
271
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Move the wiper arms to the service
position manually.
Note: You cannot move the wiper arms to
the service position manually when you
switch the ignition on.
Note: You can use the service position to
provide easier access to the wiper blades
for freeing them from snow and ice. Make
sure the windshield is free from snow and
ice before you switch the windshield wipers
on.
Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Note: Make sure the windshield is clean
before using new wiper blades.
Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blade
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
1. Lift the wiper arm.
E183236
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Note: Make sure the rear window is clean
before using a new wiper blade.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
272
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E194757
5
273
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
1. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 258).
2
2
E194758
2
4
3
2. Remove the screws.
3. Pull the headlamp toward the front of
the vehicle to disengage it from the
lower fixing point.
4. Lift the headlamp up and remove it.
E133750
5
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb.
See Bulb Specification Chart (page 276).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
274
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp
E188959
C
Headlamp low beam.A
Headlamp low and high beam -
vehicles with high-intensity
discharge headlamps.
Headlamp high beam.B
Daytime running lamp.
Front direction indicator.C
Front Direction Indicator
1. Remove the headlamp assembly. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 274).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Headlamp Low Beam
1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Headlamp High Beam
1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Daytime Running Lamp
1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front signature lamps.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Rear side marker lamps.
• Reversing lamps.
• Side direction indicators.
275
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
License Plate Lamp
3
2
1
E72789
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern, and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
HIDH15Daytime running lamps.
21WY21WFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamp.
LEDLEDFront signature lamp.
559005LLHeadlamp high beam.
55H11LLHeadlamp low beam.
HIDD3SHigh-intensity discharge headlamps.
5W5WLicense plate lamp.
LEDLEDRear direction indicator.
LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
276
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDInterior lamp.
LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
277
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
321).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 455).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E144365
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if not properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the air
filter housing cover to the air filter
housing.
278
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
• Motorcraft Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
• Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
• Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
• Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
• Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
• Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
• Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
279
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes
and graphics. This can damage them and
cause the edges to peel away from the
vehicle surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
280
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
WARNINGS
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
281
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 282).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
282
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
Note: Do not use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56 on Lincoln
Black Label, Presidential or Reserve
Leathers because it can damage those and
other semi-aniline leather seating fabrics.
It can also damage surround microfiber
accent surfaces. To clean Lincoln Black
Label, Presidential or Reserve Leathers, first
vacuum the seats to remove loose dirt. Then
wipe the leather with a clean soft cloth
dampened with lukewarm water and a mild
soap. Wiper the leather again with a slightly
damp cloth to remove soap residue, and dry
with a soft cloth. To maintain the leather's
resiliency, it should be cleaned whenever
soiled.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
283
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
284
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
285
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 294).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload
or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
children/infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
286
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is suppled to all four wheels through
a transfer case or power transfer unit.
Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to
select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See All-Wheel Drive
(page 170). For information on transfer
case maintenance, See Maintenance
(page 258). You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire
of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar
spare tire size (other than the spare tire
provided) or major dissimilar tire sized
between the front and rear axles could
cause the four-wheel drive system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive. See Using All-Wheel Drive (page
170).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
287
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (If
Equipped)
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains
enough sealant compound in the canister
for one tire repair only. See an authorized
Ford dealer for replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor in
the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to re-inflate the tire and a
canister of sealing compound that will
effectively seal most punctures caused by
nails or similar objects. This kit provides a
temporary tire repair, allowing you to drive
your vehicle up to 120 mi (200 km) at a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to
reach a tire service location.
288
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175977
Air compressor (inside).A
Selector switch.B
On and off button.C
Air pressure gauge.D
Sealant bottle and canister.E
Dual purpose hose: air and
repair.
F
Tire valve connector.G
Accessory power plug.H
Casing/housing.I
Bike/raft/sports ball adapters.J
General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if you have severely
damaged a tire. Only seal punctures located
within the tire tread with the kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to
the tire's sidewall. The tire may not
completely seal.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect
tire performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest
authorized Ford dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the tire
is losing pressure, have the vehicle
towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for
Use of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
To ensure safe operation of the kit:
• Read all instructions and cautions fully.
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic. Switch on
the hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle does not move
unexpectedly.
289
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the
vehicle's battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes. This will help prevent the
compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
• Sealant compound contains latex.
Those with latex sensitivities should
use appropriate precautions to avoid
an allergic reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on
a label on the sealant canister, which
you can see through the rectangular
viewing window on the bottom of the
compressor. Check the use-by date
regularly and replace the canister after
four years of non-use.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside
the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or crash. Always store the
kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, an authorized Ford
dealer must replace the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve
stem on the wheel.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD and
DVD player operation.
E175978
* When inflation only is required
for a tire or other objects, the
selector must be in the Air
position.
What to do When a Tire Is
Punctured
You can repair a tire puncture within the
tire's tread area in two stages with the kit.
• In the first stage, inflate the tire with a
sealing compound and air. After you
inflate the tire, you will need to drive
the vehicle a short distance (about 4
miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, check the tire
pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the
vehicle's specified tire inflation
pressure.
First Stage: Inflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice
any unusual bulges or deformations
in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop
and call roadside assistance.
If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within
15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
Do not run the engine during kit
operation unless the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Switch the hazard lights on. Apply the
parking brake and switch the engine off.
Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
290
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any
allergic reactions.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise.
Tighten the connection securely.
E200523
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
the casing/housing and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the
center of the dash.
6. Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running so the compressor does not
drain the vehicle’s battery.
E175981
7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Switch the kit on by pressing
the on/off button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's
door or the door jamb area. The initial
air pressure gauge reading may indicate
a value higher than the label pressure
while you pump the sealing compound
into the tire. This is normal and should
be no reason for concern. The pressure
gauge reading will indicate the tire
inflation pressure after about 30
seconds of operation. You should
check the final tire pressure with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
291
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175982
9. When the tire reaches the
recommended tire pressure, switch off
the kit, unplug the power cable, and
disconnect the hose from the tire valve.
Re-install the valve cap on the tire
valve and return the kit to the stowage
area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
Stage: Checking Tire Pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
Stage: Re-inflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and
the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar),
continue to the next step.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully
while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
E175983
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning
clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
4. If required, switch on the compressor
and adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
shown on the tire label located on the
driver's door or door jamb area. You
should check the tire pressure with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
292
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
What to Do After the Tire has Been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister. You
can obtain sealant canisters and spare
parts at an authorized Ford dealer. You can
dispose of empty sealant canisters at
home. However, you should dispose of
canisters still containing liquid sealant
through your local authorized Ford dealer
or tire dealer, or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulation.
Note: After you use the sealing compound,
the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving
distance is 120 mi (200 km). You should
inspect the sealed tire immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing
the steps listed previously in the Second
Stage: Checking Tire Pressure procedure.
Removal of the sealant canister from
the kit
E175984
1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.
E175985
2. Unwrap the power cord.
E175986
3. Remove the back cover.
E175987
4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90
degrees and pull away from
casing/housing to remove.
293
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Installation of the sealant canister to
the kit
1. With the canister held perpendicular
to the housing, insert the canister
nozzle into the connector and push
until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down
into the housing/casing.
E175988
3. Snap the back cover back into place.
E175989
4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) around the channel on the
bottom of the housing/casing.
E175990
5. Wrap the power cord around the
housing and stow the accessory power
plug into its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult an authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.
Make sure you check the sealant
compound’s use-by date regularly. The
use-by date is on a label located on the
sealant canister, which you can see
through the rectangular viewing window
on the bottom of the kit. You should
replace the sealant canister after four
years of non-use.
TIRE CARE
Important Information About
Low-Profile Tires
If your vehicle is equipped with
265/40R21 tires, they are
low-profile tires. These tires and
wheels are designed to give your
vehicle a sport appearance. With
low-profile tires, you may notice
an increase in road noise and
faster tire wear, depending on
road conditions and driving styles.
294
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Due to their design, low-profile
tires and wheels are more prone
to road damage from potholes,
rough or unpaved roads, car wash
rails and curb contact than
standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle's warranty does
not cover these types of damages.
Extra caution should be taken
when operating on rough roads to
avoid impacts that could cause
wheel and tire damage.
Important Information About
Sport Tires and Wheels
Vehicles equipped with the
optional 265/40R21 tires are
designed to enhance
performance. To continue
providing this performance, extra
care must be taken when
operating and maintaining your
vehicle.
These low-profile
high-performance tires are
designed to optimize the driving
dynamics you expect in a sport
vehicle in both dry and wet
conditions. These tires are not
optimized for off-road or winter
(snow or cold weather)
performance; and their ride, noise,
and wear characteristics are
different than non-performance
tires. With low-profile tires, you
may notice an increase in road
noise and faster wear, depending
on road conditions and driving
habits. Also, because of their
lower profile, the tires are more
susceptible to road damage from
potholes, rough or unpaved roads,
car wash rails, and curb contact
than standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’ s warranty does
not cover these types of damages.
Extra caution should be taken
when operating on rough roads to
avoid impacts that could cause
wheel and tire damage.
The optional 265/40R21 tires were
designed for track use and may
exhibit significantly reduced tread
life and increased tire noise
compared to the standard
equipment tires under normal
driving conditions. Increasing the
front camber settings beyond the
factory settings may further
accelerate tread wear and induce
tire noise.
Note: Do not use tire chains on
your vehicle’s optional 265/40R21
tires and wheels. The use of any
type of tire chain on these tires may
damage your vehicle. See Using
Snow Chains (page 311).
295
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Notice to Crossover Vehicle
Owners
E200792
Crossover vehicles handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Crossover
vehicles are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Crossover vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. To
reduce this risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other
crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers.
• Drive at safe speeds for the
conditions.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Never overload or improperly
load your vehicle.
• Make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
WARNING
In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All
occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize
the risk of injury or ejection.
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Tire Quality Grades can be
found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
296
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1 ½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
297
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: for
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tire
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position) or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
298
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
299
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
300
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure, or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure, which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
301
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
302
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles, minivans and
light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio,
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
303
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. Failure to
follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
304
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of
1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers], never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar Spare
Wheel and Tire Assembly section.
Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information section.
Store and maintain at the higher of
the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
305
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
306
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(such as load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
307
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
308
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If you cannot
detect a cause, have the vehicle
towed to the nearest repair facility
or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
309
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the scheduled
maintenance information) will
help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometime
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Front-wheel drive and All-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires on the
left side of the diagram).
E142547
310
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to about 40ºF (5ºC)
or below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and
ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been
subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 40ºF
(5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates,
you may need to use snow tires and cables.
If you need to use cables, we recommend
that you use steel wheels (of the same size
and specifications), as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction device:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• Use no larger than 10 mm cables or
chains ONLY on the front axle with
235/60R18 tires. Do not use chains or
cables on any other size tires.
• The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
• When driving with tire cables, do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
311
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and re-tighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
• Remove the cables when you no longer
need them. Do not use cables on dry
roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact an
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
312
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
313
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
314
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 312).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 312). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
an authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
315
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
316
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If your
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E175447
3. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
4. Lift the carpeted load floor panel and
secure in the up position with the
hanger clip.
5. Remove the steel winged washer nut
securing the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire compartment.
7. Remove plastic wing nut and jack and
lug wrench assembly. Detach lug
wrench from jack by turning the jack
hex nut drive screw counterclockwise.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the yellow
warning label on the jack.
E201100
10. Position the jack so that the vehicle
downward flange rests in the jack
saddle flange as shown above. Raise
the vehicle by using the lug wrench
to turn the jack nut clockwise. Once
the flat tire is raised above the
ground, remove the lug nuts with the
lug wrench.
317
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
319).
14. Fold up the wrench/jack handle and
re-attach to the jack. Re-position
jack/wrench assembly into the
original vehicle position and secure
with the plastic wing nut. Make sure
the jack is fastened securely before
you drive.
15. Unblock the wheel.
Stowing the flat tire
You cannot store the full-sized road wheel
in the temporary spare tire well.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel. Lower the
carpeted load floor.
2. Stow the flat tire in the cargo area on
the load floor with the wheel facing up.
Secure the flat tire with the retainer
strap by following the next steps.
E142906
3. Locate the rear left side and right side
cargo tie-down rings. Push the loop end
of the retainer strap through one cargo
tie-down ring. Thread the non-loop end
through the loop.
4. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
5. Locate the cargo tie-down in the
opposite rear corner of the cargo area.
Thread the retainer strap though the
tie-down and pull tight.
318
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E143746
6. Secure the flat tire by tying a 2-half
hitch knot.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
319
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
320
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
2.0L EcoBoost EngineEngine
122Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
9.7:1Compression ratio
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
2.0L Ecoboost engine
E161383
A
B
A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove
closest to engine.
B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
2.7L EcoBoost engineEngine
164Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
10.0:1Compression ratio
.028-.031 (0.7 - 0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
321
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
2.7L EcoBoost engine
E191903
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
3.5L engineEngine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
10.8:1Compression ratio
.049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L engine
E191904
322
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent
FA-1912Air filter
element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-90T5-590Battery
BAGM-48H6-760
1
SP-537Spark plugs
FP-71Cabin air filter
FS-104Seat filter
WW-2755 (driver side)Windshield
wiper blade WW-2760 (passenger side)
WW-1413 (rear window)
1
This motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Automatic-Start-Stop.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals.
323
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
2.7L EcoBoostComponent
FA-1912Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-90T5-590Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-71Cabin air filter
FS-104Seat filter
WW-2755 (driver side)Windshield wiper
blade WW-2760 (passenger side)
WW-1413 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 455).
324
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L
3.5L V6 TiVCTComponent
FA-1912Air filter
element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-90T5-590Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-71Cabin air filter
FS-104Seat filter
WW-2755 (driver side)Windshield
wiper blade WW-2760 (passenger side)
WW-1413 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 455).
325
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
326
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
327
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant
system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil
8.2 qt (7.8 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
Automatic transmission fluid
1
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.4 gal (69.5 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive)
18.5 gal (70 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive)
21 oz (0.6 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.2 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
328
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
329
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
330
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant
system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
331
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
10.6 qt (10 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
11.0 qt (10.4 L)
Automatic transmission fluid
1
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.4 gal (69.5 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive)
18.5 gal (70 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive)
21 oz (0.6 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.2 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
332
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
333
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
334
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant
system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
11.7 qt (11.1 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
11.0 qt (10.4 L)
Automatic transmission fluid
1
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.4 gal (69.5 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive)
18.5 gal (70 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive)
24.0 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.2 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
335
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
336
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
337
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
338
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
339
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
340
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E144488
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
A
SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change
the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set
for each audio source independently.
B
Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.C
Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access.
When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
D
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
E
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.F
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.G
341
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button
to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward
through the current track.
H
End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call.I
Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the
various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.
J
CD slot: Insert a CD.K
Pick-up or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming
phone call or to make a phone call.
L
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
M
Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD.N
VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
O
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system.
See SYNC™ (page 354).
P
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
Q
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
R
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.
S
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies
bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different
radio functions.
T
SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, press
this button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped with
Sirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media.
U
342
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
E188891
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
343
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency in individual increments.C
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops
at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to
the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the next
track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current
track.
D
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.E
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops
at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the previous strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the
previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through
the current track.
F
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See MyFord
Touch™ (page 388).
344
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E185814
Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on.A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.C
- TUNE + : Press these buttons to search the frequency in individual increments.D
VOL: Turn the control to adjust the volume.E
Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press one of these buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that
direction to the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press one of these buttons
to select the previous or next track. Press and hold one of these buttons to
move quickly in that direction within the current track.
F
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
345
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Radio
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to display extra information such as artist name.
Radio Text
*
*
Extra information may not always be available.
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO
mode. Only with the external sound systems.
DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.Set Time
Select to set the calendar date.Set Date
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24h Mode
346
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Dimming
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. setting
DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
347
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
348
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
349
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, press Options.
350
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
351
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury. The audio extension cable must be
long enough to allow the portable music
player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
E149149
The auxiliary input jack allows you to
connect and play music from your portable
music player through your vehicle speakers.
You can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones. Your
audio extension cable must have male
1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in
position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the auxiliary
input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a
tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on
and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press MEDIA until LINE or LINE IN
appears in the display. You should hear
music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable
music player until it reaches the volume
level of the FM station or CD. Do this
by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (If Equipped)
E149148
352
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See SYNC™ (page
354).
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
The media hub is located in front of the
gearshift.
E170492
A
C
B
Line inA
USB portsB
SD card slotC
See Entertainment (page 407).
353
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E142598
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information).
*
• Use applications, such as Pandora and
Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink.
**
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
**
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
354
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
355
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
This command
ends the voice
session. You can
also cancel a
session by holding
the voice button for
two or more
seconds.
"Cancel"
This command
provides you with
hints, examples and
instructions.
"Help"
This command
restarts the voice
session from the
initial starting point.
"Main menu"
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
356
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say "voice settings",
then any of the following:
The system:Command
Provides more
detailed interaction
and guidance.
(Recommended for
first time users.)
"Interaction mode
novice"
Provides less
audible interaction
and guidance.
"Interaction mode
advanced"
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request. For
example, the system may ask if the
command "Phone" is correct.
To adjust this setting, press the voice
button. When prompted, say "voice
settings", then any of the following:
The system:Command
Makes a best guess
from the command;
you may still occa-
sionally be asked to
confirm settings.
"Confirmation
prompts off"
Clarifies your voice
command with a
short question.
"Confirmation
prompts on"
Candidate Lists
The system creates suggestion lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice commands.
When switched on, the system may
prompt you with as many as four
possibilities for clarification.
You can switch this feature on or off by
speaking one of the following voice
commands:
The system:Command
Makes a best guess
from the media
candidate list. The
system may still
occasionally ask
you questions.
"Media candidate
lists off"
Clarifies your voice
command for
media candidates.
"Media candidate
lists on"
Makes a best guess
from the phone
candidate list. The
system may still
occasionally ask
you questions.
"Phone candidate
lists off"
Clarifies your voice
command for
phone candidates
"Phone candidate
lists on"
357
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select SYNC-Settings.
3. Select Voice Settings.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in park
(P).
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by the system in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Start a voice session, and then say
"Pair device".
3. Follow the instructions on the audio
display.
358
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in park
(P).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by the system in the audio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
"PHONE"
"Call <name>"
"Call <name> at home"
"Call <name> at work"
"Call <name> on cell"
"Call <name> on other"
"Dial"
1
"Go to handsfree"
2
"Hold call <on> <off>"
2
"Join calls"
2
"Messages"
3
"Mute call"
2
"Phone help"
"Privacy on"
2
"Turn ringer <on> <off>"
"Unmute call"
2
1
See Dial table below.
2
These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3
See Messages table below.
359
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone book commands: When you ask
SYNC to access things such as a
phonebook name or number, the
requested information appears in the
display to view. Press the phone button
and say, "Call" to call the contact.
"DIAL"
"411 (four-one-one)", "911" (nine-one-
one)
"700" (seven hundred)
"800" (eight hundred)
"900" (nine hundred)
"Clear" (deletes all entered digits)
"Delete" (deletes last set of digits
entered)
"Number <0-9>"
"Plus"
"Pound" (#)
"Star" (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
"MESSAGES"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Forward text message"
"Reply to text message"
"Call sender"
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
1. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial", then the
desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number,
say, "Dial" again to initiate the call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say,
"Delete". To erase all spoken digits, say,
"Clear".
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the accept
call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the accept call option in the
audio display.
• Reject the call by pressing the reject
call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the reject call option in the
audio display.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
360
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Dial a number
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call history
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available
361
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call history
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Speed dial
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
BT devices
View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
You have these options:
• Press the voice button and say, "Read
message".
• Select the listen option to have the
system read the message to you.
• Select the ignore option, or do nothing,
and the message goes into your text
message inbox.
362
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
• Select the view option to open the text
message. Once selected, you have the
ability to have the message read to you,
to view other messages, or to select
the More option.
• If you select the More option, use the
arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Press the OK button to access, and then
scroll through a list of pre-defined
messages to send.
Reply to sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of
the message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the
message to anyone in your phonebook or
call history. You can also choose to enter a
number.
Forward msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Allows you to send a new text message
based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and, in
addition, provides the option to have the
system read the message to you. To go to
the next message, select the More option.
This allows you to reply to the sender, call
the sender or forward the message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages
from the system (not your cellular phone).
The audio display indicates when the
system has deleted all your text messages.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or
manually trigger a download of all unread
messages from your cellular phone.
More...
363
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone, text
message notification, modify your
phonebook and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
Description and actionDisplay
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Set as master
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
Set ringtone
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
364
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn
the audible tone off or on.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook pref.
Phonebook preferences
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
Auto-download
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
3. Select from the following options:
365
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phonebook preferences
Pair additional phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-
digit PIN provided by the system in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, the
system may prompt you with questions (such as if you
want to download your phonebook). Select either yes or
no to confirm your responses.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Master
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
366
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Set defaults
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Master reset
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
Install on SYNC
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
System info
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 356).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
367
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is
compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps varies by
market.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 38). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 237).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
1. Press the phone button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll to select 911 Assist.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911
Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On or Off.
368
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
5. Press OK when the desired option
appears in the radio display. Set On or
Set Off appears in the display as
confirmation.
Off selections include:
• Off with reminder: Provides a display
and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start.
• Off without reminder: Provides a
display reminder only without a voice
reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
369
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. Once an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
1. Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen.
2. Select SyncApplications.
3. Select Mobile Apps.
4. Scroll through the list of available
applications and select a particular app
or select Find New Apps.
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app
cannot be found, make sure the required
app is running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
Once an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say "Mobile Apps".
3. Say the name of the application after
the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is
running through SYNC, you can press
the voice button and speak commands
specific to the app, for example "Play
Playlist Road Trip". Say, "Help" to
discover the available voice
commands.
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always
available:
• "Mobile apps": SYNC prompts you to
say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC.
• "List mobile apps": SYNC lists all of the
currently available mobile apps.
• "Find new apps": searches your
connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
• "<the name of an app>": At any time
you can say the name of a mobile app
to start the mobile app on SYNC.
• "<the name of an app> help": SYNC
lists the available voice commands for
the specified app if the app is running
on SYNC.
370
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App
Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
1. Press the MENU button to access the
SYNC menu.
2. Select SyncApplications > Mobile
Apps > App Settings.
3. Select the specific app or All Apps.
4. If push notifications are supported, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or
disable the feature as required.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
There are three possible statuses:
• Update Needed: The system has
detected a new app requiring
authorization or a general permissions
update is required.
• Up-To-Date: No update is required.
• Updating: The system is trying to
receive an update.
371
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
If an update is required and you want to
request this update manually, for example
when in a Wi-Fi hotspot, select Request
Update in the settings menu.
You can disable automatic updates by
selecting Disable Updates in the settings
menu. Doing so also disables the use of
Mobile Apps on SYNC.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
Using Voice Commands
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the voice button and when
prompted, say "USB" or "iPod".
3. You can now play music by saying any
of the appropriate voice commands.
See the media voice commands.
Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the AUX button until an
"initializing" message appears in the
display. Depending on how many
media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may
appear in the display. When indexing
is complete, the screen returns to the
playback menu.
You can browse the files on the USB device
in categories. Choose from the following:
• Play all
• Playlists
• Songs
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Browse USB
• Reset USB
What's Playing?
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what
is playing. The system reads the metadata
tags (if populated) of the current track.
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say "USB" or "iPod",
and then any of the following:
372
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionCommand
Pauses device playback."Pause"
Resumes device playback."Play"
Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play album <album
name>"
Play all media on the device from the first track to the last."Play all"
Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play artist <artist name>"
Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play genre <genre name>"
Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play playlist <playlist
name>"
Plays the next track on the current media."Play next track"
Plays the previous track on current media."Play previous track"
Creates a playplan of similar genre to the one currently
playing.
"Play similar music"
Commands inside the "< >" are dynamic, which means it
could be the name of anything such as album, artist or
song. This voice command is not available until indexing
is complete on your device.
"Play song <song name>"
"Repeat off"
Repeats the current track."Repeat one"
Plays the current playplan in a random order. (Not all
devices support this command.)
"Shuffle all"
"Shuffle off"
"What's playing?" or
"What's this?"
373
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
• Play song "Penny Lane".
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch on Bluetooth audio, use the AUX
or SOURCE button. You can also press
the voice button and, when prompted, say,
"Bluetooth audio".
"BLUETOOTH AUDIO"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
1. Press AUX to select USB playback.
2. Select Options to enter the media
menu, and then any of the following:
374
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
Choose to have the system play your music in random
order. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you
switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to have the system repeat the current track. Once
you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play music similar to the current type of music in
the playlist. The system uses metadata information of
each track to compile a playlist, creates a new list of similar
tracks, and then begins playing that list. (Each track must
have populated metadata tags for this feature.)
Similar music
With some devices, unpopulated metadata tags make
the tracks unavailable for voice recognition, play menu or
this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your
playing device in mass storage device mode, they are
available for voice recognition, play menu and this option.
The system places unknowns into any unpopulated
metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset SYNC USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Accessing and viewing USB media
"Browse all albums"
"Browse all artists"
"Browse all genres"
"Browse all playlists"
Accessing and viewing USB media
"Browse all songs"
"Browse album <name>"
"Browse artist <name>"
"Browse genre <name>"
"Browse playlist <name>"
Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the AUX button to select USB
playback.
375
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
3. Select Browse USB. If there are no
media files to access, the display
indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following
options:
Description and actionDisplay
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.
*
Play all
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).
*
Playlists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*
Songs
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
*
Artists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by album.
*
Albums
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*
Genres
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button to select.
376
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and actionDisplay
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 will be
located at the front of the vehicle at the
bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 will
be located inside the storage compartment
of the vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port. To switch
between the two connected USB devices
using voice commands, say, "USB1" or
"USB2". Saying "USB" defaults to the most
recently played USB device.
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Line In Audio
To access the Line In audio source, start a
voice session and say, "Line in" or "Aux".
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 358).
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
E142599
Press the voice button and say,
"Audio" when prompted, and
then any of the following
commands:
"AUDIO"
"AM"
"AM1"
"AM autoset" or "AM2"
"Bluetooth <audio> <stereo>"
"CD"
"FM"
"FM1"
"FM autoset" or "FM2"
"Line in"
"Radio"
"SAT <1-3>"
"Sirius"
377
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
"AUDIO"
"USB"
"What's playing"
"Help"
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
any of the commands in the
following table. If you are not listening to
the radio, press the voice button and, after
the tone, say, "Radio", and then any of the
following voice commands:
"RADIO"
"AM"
"AM1"
"AM autoset" or "AM2"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM preset <number>"
"AM [1] [autoset] preset <number>"
"FM"
"FM1"
"FM autoset" or "FM2"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM [autoset] preset <number>"
"FM <radio frequency> HD <1-7>"
"FM1 preset <number>"
"FM2 preset <number>"
"HD <1-7>"
"RADIO"
"Preset <number>"
"Tune"
"Help"
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, press the voice
button, and then any of the
commands in the following table. If you
are not listening to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after the tone,
say, "Sirius", and then any of the following
voice commands:
"SIRIUS"
"<0-233>"
"SAT"
"SAT1"
"SAT2"
"SAT3"
"Preset <number>"
"SAT1 preset <number>"
"SAT2 preset <number>"
"SAT3 preset <number>"
"Tune"
"Help"
378
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then any
of the commands in the
following table. If you are not listening to
a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say, "CD", and then any of the
following voice commands:
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
*
"Repeat folder"
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"CD"
"Shuffle"
*
"Shuffle CD"
"Shuffle folder"
"Shuffle off"
*
You need to indicate to the system which
track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
using these commands.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
379
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
380
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
381
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
382
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
383
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
384
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
385
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
386
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
387
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
A
B
G
C
DF
E
E161891
PhoneA
Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation)B
ClimateC
SettingsD
HomeE
InformationF
EntertainmentG
388
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display any
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 30 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Phone.
• Quick Dial.
• Phonebook.
• History.
• Messaging.
• Settings.
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home.
• Favorites.
• Previous Destinations.
• Point of Interest.
• Emergency.
• Street Address.
• Intersection.
• City Center.
• Map.
• Edit Route.
• Cancel Route.
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings.
• Recirculated Air.
• Auto.
• Dual.
• Passenger Settings.
• A/C.
• Defrost.
E142607
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
• Clock.
• Display.
• Sound.
• Vehicle.
• Settings.
• Help.
E142613
HOME
Press to access your home
screen. Depending on your
vehicle’s option package and software,
your screens may vary in appearance from
the descriptions in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on
your market. Check with an authorized
dealer for availability.
E142608
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• Services.
• Travel Link.
• Alerts.
• Calendar.
• Apps.
ENTERTAINMENT
389
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Press to select any of the following:
• AM.
• FM.
• SIRIUS.
• CD.
• USB.
• BT Stereo.
• SD Card.
• Line In.
Using the Touch Screen
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the
graphic with your finger. To get the best
performance from the touch-sensitive
controls:
• Make sure your hands are clean and
dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based
on the touch of a finger, you may have
trouble using it if you are wearing
gloves.
• Keep metal and other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen as this may cause
electronic interference (for example,
inadvertently turning on a feature other
than the one you meant to turn on).
Using the Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate
features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
media.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the
entertainment system.
• Climate Control: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system.
Using Your Steering Wheel
Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use your steering wheel
controls to interact with the touchscreen
system.
• VOL: Control the volume of audio
output.
• Mute: Mute the audio output.
• Voice: Press to start a voice session.
Press again to end an active voice
prompt, so you can begin speaking.
Press and hold to end a voice session.
• SEEK DOWN and PHONE ACCEPT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between tracks or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to
answer a call or switch between
calls.
• SEEK UP and PHONE REJECT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between tracks or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to end
a call or reject an incoming call.
See Steering Wheel (page 74).
390
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used
for cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints
are still visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray
alcohol onto the display. Do not use
detergent or any type of solvent to clean
the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports
scores, movie times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
391
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook
contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent
phone call entries
Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing videoVideos, Photos and Graphics
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity.
The log profile and other system data may
be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
392
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or your vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information
Display
E145459
393
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The display is located on the right side of
your instrument cluster (A). You can use
your steering wheel controls to view and
make minor adjustments to active modes
without taking your hands off the wheel.
For example:
• In Entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source, select memory presets and
make some adjustments.
• In Phone mode, you can accept or
reject an incoming call.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, you can view the current
route or activate a route.
E144811
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the display
instead of Navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the Compass menu, you
can see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
session (such as Listening, Success, Failed,
Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands with Your
System
E142599
Press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time
during a voice session
"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Go back"
394
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
These commands can be said at any time
during a voice session
"List of commands"
"Main menu"
"Next page"
"Previous page"
"What can I say?"
"Help"
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands
for the current session, do one of the
following:
• During a voice session, press the help
icon (?) in the lower left status bar of
the screen.
• Say, "What can I say?" for an
on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your
current voice session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone, say,
"Help" for an audible list of possible
voice commands.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice icon.
Accessing a List of Available Commands
• If you use the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List.
• If you use the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone,
speak your command clearly.
Available voice commands
"Audio list of commands"
"Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Browse list of commands"
"CD list of commands"
"Climate control list of commands"
"List of commands"
"Navigation list of commands"
*
"Phone list of commands"
"Radio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands"
"Sirius satellite list of commands"
**
"Travel link list of commands"
*
"USB list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Help"
*
This command is only available when
your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, and the navigation
system SD card is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when
you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio
subscription.
395
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction that uses candidate lists and
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
• Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode
has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
• Confirmation Prompts: The system
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice request. If turned off, the
system simply makes a best guess as
to what you requested. The system
may still occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
• Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The
system creates these lists when it has
the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
To access these settings using the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Settings icon > Settings >
then Voice Control.
2. Select from the following:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the
prompt "Please say a command".
Another tone sounds to let you know
the system is listening.
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice settings using voice commands
"Confirmation prompts off"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Interaction mode novice"
"Media candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature
which allows you to switch between using
voice commands and making on-screen
selections. This is available only when the
system displays a list of candidates
generated during a voice session. For
example, when entering in a street address
or trying to call a contact from the phone
you paired to the system.
396
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
E142607
Under this menu, you can set
your clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle
settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date.
Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected,
your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal
to update the clock. Once your vehicle
acquires the signal, it may take a few
minutes for the update to display the correct
time.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour
mode, activate GPS time synchronization
and have the system automatically update
new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air
temperature display off and on. It appears
at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
397
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display
through the touchscreen or by pressing the
voice button on your steering wheel
controls and when prompted, say, "Display
settings".
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Display, to access and make
adjustments using the
touchscreen.
• Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer.
• Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you use
the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature.
When set to Off, screen brightness
does not change.
• Mode allows you to set the screen to
a certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the
outside light level, or turn the display
off.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of turning the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Offset feature.
• Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you
to adjust screen dimming as the
outside lighting conditions change from
day to night. This feature also allows
you to adjust screen brightness using
the instrument panel dimming control.
• Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
E142607
To access, press the Settings
icon > Display > Edit
Wallpaper, and then follow the
system prompts to upload your
photographs.
Only photographs that meet the following
conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384
Sound
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Sound, then select from the
following:
Sound
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
*
398
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Sound
Occupancy Mode
*
Speed Compensated Volume
*
Your vehicle may not have these sound
settings.
Vehicle
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Vehicle, then select from the
following:
• Ambient Lighting.
• Vehicle Health Report.
• Camera Settings.
• Enable Valet Mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you turn this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates various places, such as
the footwells, with a choice of colors. To
access and make adjustments:
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or
decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the
power button.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US
Only)
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off
and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press ?
for more information on these selections.
When done making your selections, press
Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you
want your report.
You can find more information on Vehicle
Health Report in this chapter. See
Information (page 430).
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings
for your rear view camera.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Vehicle > Camera Settings,
then select from the following
settings:
• Enhanced Park Aids.
• Rear Camera Delay.
You can find more information on the rear
view camera in another chapter. See Rear
View Camera (page 193).
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Enable Valet Mode.
2. Enter a four-digit pin twice, as
prompted.
After you press Continue, the system locks
until you enter the PIN again.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, please contact the Customer
Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
399
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > System, then select
from the following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish
or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices
made through the climate or audio system.
Touch Panel Button Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or
ABC format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master Reset
Voice Control
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Voice Control, then
select from the following:
400
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice control
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-
action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not
clearly heard or understood your request.
*
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
*
Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Media Player
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Media Player, then
select from the following:
Media player
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows
you to listen to music during the indexing process. When
this feature is off, the system does not automatically
switch to the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
When this feature is on, the system automatically indexes
media on your connected Bluetooth device.
Index Bluetooth Audio
Devices
401
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Media player
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote Database Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote Management
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from
your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation, then
select from the following:
Navigation
Switch breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.
Choose to have the system display the Shortest, Fastest
or most Ecological route first. If you set Always Use
Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected
route type to calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route
selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on the preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low, medium or
high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Route Preferences
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
402
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Navigation
Have the system automatically fill in State/Province
information.
Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.Traffic Preferences
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced
visibility.
Have the system switch on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
Switch traffic alert notifications on and off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on
planned navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
Phone
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Phone, then select
from the following:
403
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring
inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring
inside your vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 430).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert
tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notification
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile
with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings
or have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
gain access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
networking and if you park outside a
wireless hotspot.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Wireless &
Internet, then select from the
following:
404
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on
and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for
connectivity purposes.
Wi-Fi Settings
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ-
ously stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can
also choose to search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more information,
prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access
point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This
forms the local area network within your vehicle for things,
such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing.
Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view
and change settings for using SYNC as the internet
gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view
recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB
mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You
must turn on your mobile broadband device on your
personal computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area
for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile
broadband settings may not display if the device is already
on.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone
Number, User Name and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving
you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,
set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to Change Order and have the
system either always attempt to connect using a USB
mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
405
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Help,
then select from the following:
Help
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications
installed on your system.
Software Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
moving.
Driving Restrictions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Informa-
tion (page 430).
911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to
save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access
if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your
phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE
1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select appear
at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
To access Help using the voice commands,
press the voice button, then, after the tone,
say "Help". The system provides allowable
voice commands for the current mode.
406
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
AM 1 and AM ASTA
FM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTB
SIRIUSC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo
and Line In
F
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets and CD controls.H
Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you
can browse through other devices without
having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to audio on an
SD card, you can browse all the artists that
are stored on your USB device.
E142599
Press the voice icon on the
steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
407
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"BROWSE" within devices
"Browse"
*
"Browse <league> games"
**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels"
**
"Browse SD card"
"Browse Sirius channel guide"
**
"Browse USB"
"Help"
*
If you only say, "Browse", you can then
say any commands in the following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
"BROWSE"
"<League> Games"
*
"<Sirius category> channels"
*
"SD card"
**
"Sirius Channel Guide"
*
"USB"
**
"Help"
*
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command. For example, if you are listening
to music on a USB device, then want to
switch to a satellite radio channel, simply
press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls and say the name of the
SIRIUS station (such as, "the Highway").
The following voice commands are
available at the top level of the voice
session no matter which current audio
source you are listening to (such as a USB
device or SIRIUS satellite radio).
Note: This is only available when your
MyFord Touch system language is set to
North American English.
Sample commands
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<530-1710>"
"<Channel name>"
*
"AM <530-1710>"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"Play [album] <name>"
**
"Play [artist] <name>"
**
"Play [genre] <name>"
**
"Play [playlist] <name>"
**
"Play [song] <name>"
**
"Play <name>"
"Play <name (song or album)> by <artist
name>"
408
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Sample commands
"Sirius <0-223>"
*
"Sports games"
*
*
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite
radio.
**
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this
is the same as the voice command, "Play
[artist] <name>".
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets,
just touch the AM or FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one
of the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally, where
available, providing free, crystal-clear
sound. See HD Radio information later in
this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
TAG Button
This feature is available when HD Radio is
on, and allows you to tag a song to
download later. When you select On, TAG
appears on-screen when HD Radio is
active. You can touch TAG to save the
information of the song that is playing.
When you plug in your portable music
player, the information transfers, if
supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to
remind you of the songs you would like to
download. See HD Radio information later
in this chapter.
409
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the
desired station number. Touch Enter when
you are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD Radio logo is grey when acquiring
a digital station, and then changes to
orange when digital audio is playing. When
this logo is available, you may also see Title
and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on. To turn the feature on and use it:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
Button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch
TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the
song's information and transfers it to
your portable music player (if
supported) when you connect it to the
system. The system automatically
transfers the tag to your player (if
already connected) and a pop-up
confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system
allows you to tag up to approximately
100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
410
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
411
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to the radio, press
the voice button and, after the tone, say
"Radio", then any of the following
commands.
412
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"RADIO"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"
1
"<530-1710>"
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"Browse"
2
"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
1
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
1
"Preset <#>"
"Radio off"
"Radio on"
"Set PTY"
"RADIO"
"Tune"
3
"Help"
1
If available.
2
If you have said "Browse", see the
"Browse" chart later in this section.
3
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"TUNE"
"<530-1710>"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
413
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"TUNE"
"HD <#>"
*
"Preset <#>"
"Help"
*
If available.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Memory Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the
channel. Sound returns when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite.
If you are listening to music, you can save
the song or artist, so the system can alert
you when they are playing on a satellite
radio channel. If you are listening to a
sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so the system can alert you when
they are playing on a satellite radio
channel. You can also edit alerts or turn
alerts on or off.
When an alert appears on the screen, you
can choose to tune to the channel, cancel
the alert or turn off alerts.
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for Alert
feature variation.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You
can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
to the current station. Changing stations
erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause
the audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if
you have been using the feature to
replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of channels.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
414
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You can
then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock
channels, change or reset your PIN or
unlock all channels. To use this feature,
you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts
This feature allows you turn alerts on and
off.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
SIRIUS requires this number when
communicating with you about your
account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the
desired satellite channel number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all
available stations. Scroll to see more
categories. Touch the station you want to
listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this
channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to
listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and
artists on other stations.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
415
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, touch the bottom left corner of the
touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseRadio display
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring...
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS System
Failure.
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel.
416
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseRadio display
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating.
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Call SIRIUS
1-888-539-7474.
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check Channel
Guide.
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "SIRIUS", then any of the
following commands.
"SIRIUS"
"<Channel name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT preset <#>"
"SIRIUS"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Sirius off"
"Sirius on"
"Sports game"
*
417
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"SIRIUS"
"Tune"
**
"Help"
*
If you have said "Sports game", see the
following "Sports game" chart.
**
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME"
"Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game"
"Tune to the <team city> <team name>
game"
"Tune to the <team name> game"
"Help"
"TUNE"
"<Channel Name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Help"
CD
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder, if applicable.
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or
entire albums in random order, or turn the
feature off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Compression
Touch this button to turn the compression
feature on and off.
418
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Browse
Touch this button to look through all
available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",
then any of the following commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
"Repeat folder"
*
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle CD"
*
"Shuffle folder"
*
"Shuffle off"
"Help"
*
This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 442).
E175710
The SD card slot is located in the center
console. To access and play music from
your device, press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
419
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
USB Port
E175711
The USB ports are located in the center
console. To access and play music from
your device, press the lower left corner of
the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select the
SD Card or USB tab once the
system recognizes it. You can
then select from the following options:
Repeat
This feature replays the currently playing
song or album.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play music on the
selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music
This feature allows you to choose music
similar to what is currently playing.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information
such as current track, artist name, album
and genre.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings allows you to adjust
settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Media Player Settings allows you to
select more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 397).
Device Information displays software
and firmware information about the
currently connected media device.
Update Media Index indexes your device
when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (such as
adding or removing tracks) to make sure
you have the latest voice commands
available for all media on the device.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, such as genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information such
as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
420
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
You can also touch What’s Playing to
hear how the system pronounces the
current band and song. This can be helpful
when using voice commands to make sure
the system correctly plays your request.
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a USB
device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device or
an SD card, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card",
then any of the following commands.
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Browse"
*
"Next"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play album <name>"
"Play all"
"Play artist <name>"
"Play audiobook <name>"
"Play author <name>"
"Play composer <name>"
"Play folder <name>"
"Play genre <name>"
"Play movie <name>"
**
"Play music video <name>"
**
"Play playlist <name>"
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Play podcast <name>"
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Play similar music"
"Play song <name>"
"Play TV show <name>"
**
"Play TV show episode <name>"
**
"Play video <name>"
**
"Play video podcast <name>"
**
"Play video podcast episode <name>"
**
"Play video playlist <name>"
**
"Previous"
"Repeat all"
"Repeat off"
"Repeat one"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle album"
"Shuffle off"
"What's this?"
"Help"
*
If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to
browse. When prompted, see the following
"Browse" chart.
**
These commands are only available in
USB mode and are device-dependent.
421
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"BROWSE"
"Album <name>"
"All albums"
"All artists"
"All audiobooks"
"All authors"
"All composers"
"All folders"
"All genres"
"All movies"
*
"All music videos"
*
"All playlists"
"All podcasts"
"All songs"
"All TV shows"
*
"All video playlists"
*
"All video podcasts"
*
"All videos"
*
"Artist <name>"
"Audiobook <name>"
"Author <name>"
"Composer <name>"
"Folder <name>"
"Genre <name>"
"Playlist <name>"
"Podcast <name>"
"BROWSE"
"TV show <name>"
*
"Video <name>"
*
"Video playlist <name>"
*
"Video podcast <name>"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as Unknown.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
422
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
control. When prompted, say "Next song",
"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio
device, press the voice button and, after
the tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play"
or "Previous song".
Line In
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury. The audio extension cable must be
long enough to allow the portable music
player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
Your auxiliary input jack allows you to play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers. The jack is located
in your center console.
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select Line In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable music player
is designed for use with headphones and
that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
both ends.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in
position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the jacks inside the
center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
station or a CD (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the Line In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it may
be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable
music player until it reaches the level
of the FM station or CD by switching
back and forth between the controls.
423
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to
a line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume
control.
• Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary
to match the volume of the CD or FM
radio as this causes distortion and
reduces sound quality.
• If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
batteries in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (such as Play
or Pause) over the attached portable
media player.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
424
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once you pair your
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with
SYNC. This allows you to use your phone
in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in park (P).
Switch on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC
appears on the screen, and instructs
you to begin the pairing process from
your device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your phone’s manual
if necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your phone's
manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in park (P).
Switch on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the
touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices
> Add Device.
425
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your phone’s manual
if necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your phone's
manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button on your
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, "Call <name>"
or say "Dial", then the desired number.
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press this phone button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen or
by pressing this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
E142632
Reject the call by pressing
Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen
numerical pad to enter a number and place
a call. During an active call, you can also
choose to:
• Mute the call.
• Put the call on hold.
• Turn on the privacy feature.
• Join two calls.
• End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from your
phonebook or history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phone book. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen.
To switch on contact picture settings, if
your device supports this feature, press
Phone > Settings > Manage Phonebook
> Download photos from Phonebook
> On.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.
426
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
If your phone does not support downloading
call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps
track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your
touchscreen. See Text messaging later
in this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, such as turning Bluetooth on and
off, managing your phonebook and more.
See Phone settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, such
as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon).
• Dial.
• Send Text.
• View.
• Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from
your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
• Send, which sends the message as it
is.
• Edit Text, which allows you to
customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.
Text message options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
427
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Text message options
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle
is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message
to you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add
or delete a device, as well as save it as a
favorite.
Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go
directly to your voice mail and not ring in
the vehicle. When this feature is on, text
message notifications do not ring inside
the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.
See Information (page 430).
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when
you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired
phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech
or a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if
supported by your phone. Choose from
possible system alert tones,
text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen
to adjust your internet data connection.
Select to make your connection profile
with the personal area network or to switch
off your connection. You can also choose
to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for
more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such
as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete
or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert
you when your phone is in roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
428
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"PHONE"
"Call"
"Call <name>"
"Call <name> at home"
"Call <name> at work"
"Call <name> on cell"
"Call <name> on other"
"Call voicemail"
"Dial"
"Do not disturb off"
"Do not disturb on"
"Forward text messages"
"Go to hands free"
*
"Hold call off"
*
"Hold on"
*
"Join calls"
*
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Messages"
**
"Mute call"
*
"PHONE"
"Pair phone"
"Privacy on"
*
"Read text message"
"Reply to text messages"
"Turn ringer off"
"Turn ringer on"
"Unmute call"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available during an
active call.
**
If you say "Messages", see the following
"Messages" chart for additional
commands.
"MESSAGES"
"Call"
"Forward text messages"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"
429
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
INFORMATION
A
B
C
D
E
E161889
SYNC ServicesA
Sirius Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
SYNC ApplicationsE
Under the Information menu, you can
access features such as:
• SYNC Services
• Sirius Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Applications
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
430
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 424).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands
E142599
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow
the voice prompts to request the
desired service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
431
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
the Touchscreen
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services
using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the Services
main menu or for help, say, "Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location you can
say "Operator" at any time within a
Directions or Business search to speak
with a live operator. The system may
prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by
name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download
is finished, the phone call automatically
ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar
of your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also receive
driving instructions from audible
prompts.
• When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Yes" when prompted and the system
delivers a new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 442).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
432
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide
quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You
can also save favorite information like sports teams, such
as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more
about personalization by logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to
SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio
clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your
phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
"SERVICES"
"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
"Route summary"
"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
433
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your
vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicle’s location or
on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map
to see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and
winds. Select Area to select from a listing
of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You can
also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes
when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions
for a specific area.
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
"Sports headlines"
*
"Sports schedules"
*
"Sports scores"
*
"Traffic"
"Weather"
434
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"Weather map"
"Help"
*
If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports
schedules" or "Sports scores", you can
then say any of the commands in the
following chart.
Sports-related commands
"Baseball"
"College basketball"
"College football"
"Golf"
"MLS"
"My teams"
"NBA"
"NFL"
"NHL"
"WNBA"
"Help"
Additional sports-related voice
commands
"Baseball headlines"
"Baseball schedule"
"Baseball scores"
"College basketball headlines"
"College basketball schedule"
"College basketball scores"
"College football headlines"
Additional sports-related voice
commands
"College football schedule"
"College football scores"
"Golf headlines"
"Golf leaderboard"
"Golf schedule"
"MLS headlines"
"MLS schedule"
"MLS scores"
"Motor sports headlines"
"Motor sports order"
"Motor sports schedule"
"My team headlines"
"My teams schedule"
"My teams scores"
"NBA headlines"
"NBA schedule"
"NBA scores"
"NFL headlines"
"NFL schedule"
"NFL scores"
"NHL headlines"
"NHL schedule"
"NHL scores"
"WNBA headlines"
435
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Additional sports-related voice
commands
"WNBA schedule"
"WNBA scores"
"Help"
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any
of the following services:
• View the complete message.
• Delete the message.
• Delete All messages.
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
436
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts
where fitted or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 38). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 237).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.
E142607
You can also access 911 Assist
by:
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings
> Phone > 911 Assist, or
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911
Assist.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
SYNC attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
437
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist May Not Work If:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information.
• Scheduled maintenance.
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report
E142608
If you want to run a report by
using the touchscreen, touch
Apps > Vehicle Health Report.
438
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142599
To run a report by voice
command, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health
report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 397).
E171848
K
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings:B
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat
off and on (if equipped).
439
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Touch Dual to switch separate passenger side temperature controls off and
on. When you switch off Dual, the passenger side temperature changes to
match the driver side temperature.
Note: The passenger side temperature and the Dual indicator automatically
turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature control.
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
C
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan
speed indicators turn off.
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except Max A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
Max A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Touch the button to switch air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
F
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the
air conditioning with the A/C button.
Auto: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the Auto button to switch off dual zone operation by touching
and holding the button for more than two seconds.
G
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 131).
H
Max Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside air flows
through the windshield vents, fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed
and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position. You can use this
setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated
rear window also automatically turns on when you select Max Defrost.
I
Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to switch airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through any combination of these vents.
J
440
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when MAX
Defrost is on.
Driver settings:K
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the driver side
of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat
off and on (if equipped).
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold
MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
Touch the heated steering wheel icon to switch the heated steering wheel on
and off (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
Note: The fan speed automatically
decreases when you start a voice command
session or phone call through SYNC. This
feature is dependent on the current climate
control settings and helps to reduce the
background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed returns to normal when the voice
session ends. You can adjust the fan speed
manually during this time by using the fan
button or knob to reach the desired setting.
To disable or enable automatic fan speed,
press and hold the AC and Recirculated air
buttons at the same time. Release the
buttons and immediately increase the fan
speed.
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
Climate Control Commands
"Climate automatic"
"Climate my temperature"
"Climate off"
"Climate on"
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5>
degrees"
"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Help"
There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access them,
you have to say "Climate" first. When the
system is ready to listen, you may say any
of the following commands:
"CLIMATE"
"A/C off"
"A/C on"
"Automatic"
"Defrost off"
441
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
"CLIMATE"
"Defrost on"
"Dual off"
"Floor on"
"Fan decrease"
"Fan increase"
"MAX A/C off"
"MAX A/C on"
"My temp"
"Off"
"On"
"Panel floor on"
"Panel off"
"Panel on"
"Rear defrost off"
"Rear defrost on"
"Recirc off"
"Recirc on"
"Temperature"
*
"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Temperature decrease"
"Temperature high"
"Temperature increase"
"Temperature low"
"CLIMATE"
"Windshield floor on"
"Help"
*
If you say "Temperature", you can then
say any of the commands in the following
chart.
"TEMPERATURE"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"<60-85> degrees"
"High"
"Low"
"Help"
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the Dest button
when it appears. See Setting a
Destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right-hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map. See
Map mode later in this chapter.
442
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen,
then the Dest button when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
1. Enter the necessary information into
the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry,
the Go! button appears once you enter
all the necessary information. Pressing
the Go! button makes the address
location appear on the map. If you
choose Previous Destination, the last
20 destinations you have selected
appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to set
this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. The system considers any
Avoid Areas selections in its route
calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types
of routes, and then select Start Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.
You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and
car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes.
(High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the
upper right navigation corner (green bar)
if you want the system to repeat route
guidance information. When the system
repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance
instruction, since it detects when the
vehicle is moving.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
443
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Main categories
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.
Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price as well as the
website. This screen displays the point of
interest icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
444
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information
for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the
hotel has certain services and facilities
using icons, such as:
• Restaurant.
• Business center.
• Handicap facilities.
• Laundry.
• Refrigerator.
• 24 hour room service.
• Fitness center.
• Internet access.
• Pool.
• Wi-fi.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled
route with white dots. Switch this feature
ON or OFF.
Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top
to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Parking POI Notification
Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification
is on, the icons display on the map when
you get close to your destination. This may
not be very useful in dense areas, and may
clutter the map when other points of
interest display.
Route Preferences
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred
Route to Yes, the system uses the
selected route type to calculate only one
route to the desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
445
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Avoid
These features allow you to choose to
have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,
ferries and car trains when planning your
route. Switch these features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes, if available, when planning
your route.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
Have the system use Voice & Tones or
Tone Only on your programmed route.
Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the
state and province based on the
information already entered into the
system. Switch this feature ON or OFF.
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems
Choose how you want the system to
handle traffic problems along your route.
• Automatic: Have the system reroute
you to avoid traffic incidents that
develop and impact the current route.
The system does not provide a traffic
alert notification.
• Manual: Have the system always
provide a traffic alert notification for
traffic incidents along the planned
route. You have a choice to accept or
ignore the notification before making
the route deviation.
Traffic Alert Notification
Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to
turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads. Scroll down to view all
the different types of alerts. Switch these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas
Choose areas which you want the system
to avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To
delete a selection, choose the listing on
the screen. When the screen changes to
Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete
at the bottom right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.
446
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E174016
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes: Heading up, North up and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The
system remembers this setting for larger
map scales, but shows the map in North
up only. If the scale returns below this level,
the system restores Heading up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
View switches between full map, street
list and exit view in route guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
447
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon
more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest
categories on the map at one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
Set as Dest
Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination.
You may scroll the map by pressing your
index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go
and then touch Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current
location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current
location to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three
icons to display on the map at the same
time. Turn these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active
route.
View/Edit Route
Access these features when a route is
active:
• View Route
• Edit Destination/Waypoints
448
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
• Edit Turn List
• Detour
• Edit Route Preferences
• Edit Traffic Preferences
• Cancel Route.
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Nokia by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ
(1-866-462-8837) (in Mexico, call
01-800-557-5539) or going to
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone,
say any of the following commands:
Navigation system voice commands
"Cancel next waypoint"
1
"Cancel route"
1
"Destination"
2
"Destination <nametag>"
"Destination <POI category>"
"Destination favorites"
"Destination home"
Navigation system voice commands
"Destination intersection"
"Destination nearest <POI category>"
"Destination nearest POI"
"Destination play nametags"
"Destination POI"
"Destination POI category"
"Destination previous destination"
"Destination street address"
"Detour"
1
"Navigation"
3
"Navigation voice volume decrease"
"Navigation voice volume increase"
"Repeat instruction"
1
"Show 3D"
"Show heading up"
"Show map"
"Show north up"
"Show route"
1
"Show turn list"
1
"Voice guidance off"
"Voice guidance on"
"Where am I?"
"Zoom in"
449
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Navigation system voice commands
"Zoom out"
"Help"
1
These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
2
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following
"Destination" chart.
3
If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following
"Navigation" chart.
"DESTINATION"
"<nametag>"
"<POI category>"
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest <POI category>"
"Nearest POI"
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION"
"Destination"
*
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"NAVIGATION"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
*
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation
destination street address" or "Destination
street address", the system asks you to say
the full address. The system displays an
example on-screen. You can then speak
the address naturally, such as "One two
three four Main Street, Anytown".
450
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact an authorized dealer or visit our
online store at www.Accessories.Ford.com
(United States only).
Ford Motor Company repairs or replaces
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company warrants your
vehicle's accessory through the warranty
that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Ambient lighting.
• Electrochromic compass and
temperature interior mirrors.
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Cross bars and roof rails.
• Roof rack and carriers*.
• SUV camping tent*.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Bumper- and hitch-mounted parking
sensors*.
• Bumper protector.
• Car cover*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo security shade.
• Keyless entry keypad.
• Remote start.
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
451
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
452
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
453
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States, provided
by a network of participating authorized
Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
and the United States are not eligible for
Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
454
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 321).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
455
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 263).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
456
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
457
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
you use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE
OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
458
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Lubricate any areas with grease fittings (All-wheel drive vehicles).
459
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 262).
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
Replace timing belt.
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
460
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing
in the information display.
• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000-mile
(48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30000
miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
461
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 262).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
462
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3000 miles (5000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1800 miles (3000 kilometers).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
463
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
464
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
465
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
466
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
467
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
468
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
469
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
470
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
471
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
472
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
473
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
474
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
475
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
476
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
477
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
478
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
479
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
480
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
481
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
482
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
483
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
484
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
485
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
486
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando quale
riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto
prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000; Norwe-
gian Mapping Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
487
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
“Based upon electronic data
© National Land Survey
Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage: ©
Bundesamt für Landestopo-
graphie.
Switzer-
land
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
488
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
489
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
490
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
491
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
TYPE APPROVALS
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
Schrader AG2SZ4 Numero de Registro
CNC: H-13498
Argentina
TRA
REGISTERED NO:ER0I30238/14
DEALER NO:DA0047074/10
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
E197509
Brazil
Herby, Schrader Electronics UK Ltd.,
declares that this TPMS is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other
provisions of directive 1999/5/EC. The
declaration of conformity may be
consulted at emcteam@schrader.co.uk
European Union EU
Kingdom of Jordon Type approval for tyre
pressure sensor.
Model: AG2SZ4
Manufacturer: Schrader Electronics
492
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2014/
56
Jordon
RAQP/33A/0514/S/(14-0847)
Malaysia
E197811
Moldova
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d'agrément: MR9098
ANRT 2014
Date d'agrément: 14/03/2014
Morocco
E198001
Philippines
E197844
Serbia
E198002
South Africa
E198009
Ukraine
493
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
494
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................124
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................175
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................175
Accessories.....................................................451
Exterior Style........................................................451
Interior Style.........................................................451
Lifestyle..................................................................451
Peace of Mind......................................................451
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............197
Active Park Assist.........................................187
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature................................................................191
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking,
Park Out Assist...............................................187
Troubleshooting the System...........................191
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................272
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................272
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................74
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................74
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................75
End of Travel Position.........................................75
Memory Feature....................................................75
Airbag Disposal..............................................46
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................124
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................73
All-Wheel Drive.............................................170
Ambient Lighting............................................87
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................73
Arming the Alarm.................................................73
Disarming the Alarm...........................................73
Appendices.....................................................471
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............98
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................99
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................98
Keyless Warning Alert........................................99
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................99
Audio Control...................................................75
MEDIA.......................................................................75
Seek, Next or Previous........................................75
Audio Input Jack...........................................352
Audio System................................................339
General Information.........................................339
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................340
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................343
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD..........................................................344
Menu Structure...................................................345
Autolamps........................................................82
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................82
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)/Sony Audio
System...........................................................127
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)...........................................126
Automatic High Beam Control.................84
Activating the System........................................84
Manually Overriding the System....................85
Automatic Transmission...........................166
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................168
Brake-Shift Interlock..........................................167
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................168
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................166
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission............................166
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.0L EcoBoost™.......................................266
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.7L EcoBoost™/3.5L..............................267
Adding Transmission Fluid ............................268
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level
..............................................................................267
495
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................156
Disabling Auto StartStop.................................157
Enabling Auto StartStop.................................156
Autowipers........................................................78
Auxiliary Power Points................................147
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................147
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................147
Locations................................................................147
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive..........................................170
B
Blind Spot Information System.............208
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS™)
with Cross Traffic Alert...............................208
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........258
Booster Seats..................................................24
Types of Booster Seats......................................25
Brake Fluid Check........................................268
Brakes................................................................175
General Information...........................................175
Breaking-In.....................................................234
Bulb Specification Chart...........................276
C
Cabin Air Filter.................................................131
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................328
Specifications.....................................................329
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................331
Specifications......................................................332
Capacities and Specifications -
3.5L.................................................................335
Specifications.....................................................336
Capacities and Specifications.................321
Cargo Nets.......................................................217
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279
Center Console..............................................149
Changing a Bulb...........................................274
Headlamp.............................................................275
LED Lamps...........................................................275
License Plate Lamp...........................................276
Changing a Fuse...........................................257
Fuses.......................................................................257
Changing a Road Wheel............................315
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................315
Stowing the flat tire ..........................................318
Tire Change Procedure.....................................316
Changing the 12V Battery.........................269
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................278
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................271
Service Position...................................................271
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................271
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................36
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Left-Hand Side.....................................................28
Right-Hand Side...................................................28
Child Seat Positioning..................................26
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................282
Cleaning Products.......................................279
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................283
Cleaning the Engine...................................280
Cleaning the Exterior..................................279
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................279
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................280
Stripes or Graphics...........................................280
Underbody...........................................................280
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................281
Cleaning the Interior....................................281
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................281
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................55
Climate............................................................439
Climate Control Voice Commands..............441
Climate Control.............................................124
Climate Controlled Seats...........................141
Cooled Seats.........................................................141
Cold Weather Precautions.......................234
Collision Warning System..........................212
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................212
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................263
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........45
496
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................55
Cruise Control..................................................76
Principle of Operation......................................196
Type 1.........................................................................76
Type 2........................................................................77
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................196
Customer Assistance.................................242
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................83
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................83
Type 2 - Configurable.........................................83
Digital Radio...................................................347
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................348
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Drive Control...................................................215
Adaptive Steering...............................................216
Driver Select Suspension.................................215
Driver Alert.....................................................203
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..........................203
USING DRIVER ALERT....................................203
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................39
Children and Airbags..........................................39
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................39
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags........43
Driving Aids....................................................203
Driving Hints...................................................234
Driving Through Water...............................234
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................83
E
Economical Driving.....................................234
Electric Parking Brake..................................176
Applying the Electric Parking brake.............176
Battery With No Charge...................................178
Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a Manual
Transmission) .................................................176
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake............177
Emission Control System..........................163
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................164
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................164
End User License Agreement...................471
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)...............................................................471
Engine Block Heater....................................154
Using the Engine Block Heater......................155
Engine Coolant Check...............................263
Adding Engine Coolant....................................264
Checking the Engine Coolant.......................264
Recycled Engine Coolant................................265
Severe Climates.................................................265
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling..............................................................265
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71
Engine Oil Check..........................................262
Adding Engine Oil..............................................262
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................262
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L EcoBoost™/
3.5L.................................................................262
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Drivebelt Routing................................................321
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................321
Drivebelt Routing...............................................322
Engine Specifications - 3.5L....................322
Drivebelt Routing...............................................322
497
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Entertainment..............................................407
AM/FM Radio.....................................................409
Bluetooth Audio.................................................422
Browsing Device Content...............................407
CD.............................................................................418
Line In.....................................................................423
SD Card Slot and USB Port............................419
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).........................................................414
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................422
Environment......................................................14
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................176
Essential Towing Checks..........................229
Before Towing a Trailer....................................230
Hitches...................................................................229
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................230
Safety Chains......................................................229
Trailer Brakes.......................................................229
Trailer Lamps.......................................................229
When Towing a Trailer.....................................230
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................453
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............454
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only).........................453
Exterior Mirrors................................................89
Auto-dimming Feature......................................89
Blind Spot Information System......................90
Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................89
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................89
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................89
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................90
Memory Mirrors ....................................................89
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................89
Puddle Lamps.......................................................89
F
Fastening the Safety Belts.........................30
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt................................32
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.....................33
Safety Belt Locking Modes................................31
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy............31
Using the Sliding Clip.........................................30
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..........................288
Floor Mats.......................................................235
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Front Parking Aid..........................................184
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................184
Front Passenger Sensing System............40
Front View Camera......................................214
Using the Front View Camera........................215
Fuel and Refueling.......................................158
Fuel Consumption........................................162
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................163
Filling the Tank.....................................................162
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................159
Fuel Filter........................................................269
Fuel Quality....................................................159
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................159
Fuel Shutoff...................................................238
Fuses................................................................248
Fuse Specification Chart..........................248
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................254
Power Distribution Box....................................248
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............143
Gauges...............................................................93
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............94
Fuel Gauge.............................................................94
Information Display.............................................93
Left Information Display....................................95
Type 1........................................................................93
Type 2.......................................................................95
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................47
Intelligent Access..................................................47
General Maintenance Information.......455
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................457
Owner Checks and Services.........................456
Protecting Your Investment...........................455
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................455
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................455
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................245
498
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Getting the Services You Need...............242
Away From Home..............................................242
Global Opening..............................................88
Opening the Windows.......................................89
H
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................238
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................83
Head Restraints.............................................133
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................134
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................134
Heated Seats.................................................140
Front Seats...........................................................140
Rear Seats.............................................................140
Heated Steering Wheel................................77
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................131
Heated Exterior Mirror........................................131
Heated Rear Window.........................................131
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................124
Hill Start Assist..............................................178
Switching the System On and Off................179
Using Hill Start Assist........................................179
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................129
Cooling the Interior Quickly............................130
General Hints.......................................................129
Heating the Interior Quickly............................130
Recommended Settings for Cooling .........130
Recommended Settings for Heating..........130
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................130
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................175
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........258
I
Ignition Switch...............................................150
In California (U.S. Only).............................243
Information Display Control........................77
Information Display Control Features...........77
Information Displays..................................100
General Information.........................................100
Information....................................................430
911 Assist...............................................................436
Alerts......................................................................436
Calendar...............................................................436
Sirius Travel Link................................................433
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only).................................................................430
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United
States Only)...................................................438
Information Messages...............................109
Active Park.............................................................110
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................110
Airbag........................................................................111
Alarm.........................................................................111
All-Wheel Drive.....................................................112
Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................112
Automatic High Beam Control.......................112
Auto Start-Stop....................................................113
Battery and Charging System.........................113
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................114
Doors and Locks...................................................114
Driver Alert..............................................................115
Electronic Stability Control..............................115
Engine......................................................................115
Fuel...........................................................................116
Hill Start Assist.....................................................116
Keys and Keyless Entry......................................116
Lane Keeping System.........................................117
Maintenance..........................................................117
MyKey.......................................................................118
Park Aid...................................................................119
Park Brake..............................................................119
Power Steering....................................................120
Pre-Collision Warning System.......................120
Remote Start.........................................................121
Seats.........................................................................121
Starting System ...................................................121
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................121
Towing.....................................................................122
Traction Control...................................................122
Transmission.........................................................122
Installing Child Seats.....................................16
Child Seats...............................................................16
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................21
Using Tether Straps.............................................23
499
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Instrument Cluster.........................................93
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................83
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Front Interior Lamp.............................................85
Rear Interior Lamp...............................................87
Interior Mirror...................................................90
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................90
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................239
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................239
Jump Starting.....................................................240
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................239
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................240
K
Keyless Entry...................................................68
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................68
Keyless Starting - Vehicles With: Push
Button Start................................................150
Ignition Modes......................................................151
Keys and Remote Controls.........................47
L
Lane Keeping System................................204
Switching the System On and Off..............205
Lighting Control...............................................81
Headlamp Flasher...............................................82
High Beams.............................................................81
Lighting...............................................................81
General Information.............................................81
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............217
Load Carrying..................................................217
Load Limit........................................................218
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................225
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................218
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Activating Intelligent Access............................62
Autolock ..................................................................63
Auto Relock............................................................63
Autounlock.............................................................63
Battery Saver.........................................................64
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock........................................................63
Illuminated Entry..................................................63
Illuminated Exit.....................................................64
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade.............................................................61
Power Door Locks................................................60
Remote Control....................................................60
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................62
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................62
Locks..................................................................60
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................315
M
Maintenance.................................................258
General Information.........................................258
Manual Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Manual Temperature
Control (EMTC)..........................................124
Manual Liftgate..............................................64
Closing the Liftgate.............................................65
Opening the Liftgate...........................................64
Manual Seats.................................................135
Media Hub......................................................353
Memory Function..........................................137
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................139
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob......................................................................138
Saving a PreSet Position.................................138
Message Center
See: Information Displays...............................100
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................131
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................88
Mobile Communications Equipment.......12
Moonroof............................................................91
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............91
500
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................323
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................324
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................325
MyFord Touch™..........................................388
General Information.........................................388
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
MyKey™.............................................................54
Principle of Operation........................................54
N
Navigation......................................................442
cityseekr................................................................444
Map Mode............................................................446
Navigation Map Updates...............................449
Navigation Voice Commands.......................449
Point of Interest (POI) Categories..............443
Quick-touch Buttons.......................................448
Setting a Destination.......................................443
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........445
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........458
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®.........................458
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................459
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................263
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................262
Opening and Closing the Hood..............258
Closing the Hood...............................................259
Opening the Hood.............................................258
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................246
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........246
Overhead Console.......................................149
P
Parking Aids....................................................183
Principle of Operation.......................................183
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................71
SecuriLock®............................................................71
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................71
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................37
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................37
Phone...............................................................424
Making Calls........................................................426
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................425
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time........425
Phone Menu Options.......................................426
Phone Settings...................................................428
Phone Voice Commands................................428
Receiving Calls...................................................426
Text Messaging...................................................427
Post-Crash Alert System...........................241
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking............................60
Power Liftgate.................................................65
Obstacle Detection..............................................67
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................65
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................67
Power Seats....................................................135
10-way power seat.............................................137
6-way power seat..............................................136
Power Lumbar......................................................137
Power Steering Fluid Check....................269
Power Windows.............................................88
Accessory Delay...................................................88
Bounce-Back.........................................................88
One-Touch Down................................................88
One-Touch Up......................................................88
Protecting the Environment........................14
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................183
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................184
Rear Seat Armrest........................................142
Rear Seats.......................................................139
Adjusting the Rear Seats.................................139
Rear Under Floor Storage...........................217
Cargo Management System...........................217
Rear View Camera.......................................193
Using the Rear View Camera System.........193
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................193
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..........80
Rear Window Washer........................................80
Rear Window Wiper............................................80
Recommended Towing Weights............227
501
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Refueling.........................................................160
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.................161
Remote Control...............................................47
Car Finder.................................................................51
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ..................47
Intelligent Access Key........................................48
Remote Start .........................................................51
Replacing the Battery.........................................49
Sounding a Panic Alarm.....................................51
Using the Key Blade............................................48
Remote Start...................................................131
Automatic Settings............................................132
Removing a Headlamp..............................274
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............283
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................53
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................247
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................246
Roadside Assistance...................................237
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................237
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................237
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................237
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................237
Roadside Emergencies..............................237
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................217
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................234
Running Out of Fuel....................................159
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................160
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................160
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................34
Safety Belt Minder.........................................35
Belt-Minder™........................................................35
Safety Belts......................................................29
Principle of Operation........................................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................34
Conditions of operation.....................................34
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Safety Precautions......................................158
Satellite Radio..............................................349
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................350
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............350
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................350
Troubleshooting..................................................351
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........463
Scheduled Maintenance...........................455
Seats..................................................................133
Security................................................................71
Settings............................................................397
Clock.......................................................................397
Display...................................................................398
Settings................................................................400
Sound....................................................................398
Vehicle...................................................................399
Side Airbags.....................................................42
Side Sensing System..................................185
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................186
Sitting in the Correct Position..................133
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................311
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................461
Exceptions............................................................463
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................196
Stability Control.............................................181
Principle of Operation........................................181
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................150
502
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................151
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................153
Failure to Start.....................................................153
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................154
Important Ventilating Information...............154
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................154
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................153
Vehicles with an Ignition Key...........................151
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................152
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........150
General Information..........................................150
Steering.............................................................212
Electric Power Steering.....................................212
Steering Wheel................................................74
Storage Compartments.............................149
Sunroof
See: Moonroof........................................................91
Sun Visors..........................................................91
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................91
Supplementary Restraints System.........38
Principle of Operation........................................38
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................368
911 Assist...............................................................368
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................370
SYNC™...........................................................354
General Information.........................................354
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................379
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate...........................................64
See: Power Liftgate.............................................65
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............321
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................288
First Stage: Inflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air......................................290
General Information.........................................289
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure............................................................292
Tips for Use of the Kit......................................289
What to Do After the Tire has Been
Sealed...............................................................293
What to do When a Tire Is
Punctured........................................................290
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................244
Tire Care..........................................................294
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................298
Important Information About Low-Profile
Tires...................................................................294
Important Information About Sport Tires
and Wheels.....................................................295
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................296
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................299
Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners..........296
Temperature A B C............................................297
Tire Rotation.........................................................310
Traction AA A B C...............................................297
Treadwear.............................................................297
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..........................288
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............312
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................313
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .......................................313
Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit..........................288
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................286
Towing a Trailer............................................226
Load Placement.................................................226
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F35................................................................231
Emergency Towing.............................................231
Recreational Towing.........................................232
503
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55..................................................232
Emergency Towing............................................232
Recreational Towing.........................................232
Towing..............................................................226
Traction Control............................................180
Principle of Operation......................................180
Trailer Sway Control....................................227
Transmission Code Designation.............327
Transmission..................................................166
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................166
Transporting the Vehicle............................231
Type Approvals............................................492
RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................492
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................259
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™................................................260
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................261
Unique Driving Characteristics................156
Universal Garage Door Opener...............143
HomeLink Wireless Control System............143
USB Port..........................................................352
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................197
Automatic Cancellation.................................200
Blocked Sensor...................................................201
Changing the Set Speed.................................199
Detection Issues................................................200
Disengaging the System..................................199
Following a Vehicle............................................198
Hilly Condition Usage......................................200
Overriding the System......................................199
Resuming the Set Speed...............................200
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............197
Setting the Gap Distance................................198
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off......................................................................200
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................197
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........202
System Not Available.......................................201
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................170
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................170
Using Cruise Control...................................196
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................196
Switching Cruise Control On..........................196
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................58
Using Snow Chains.......................................311
Using Stability Control................................182
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)..............................................................182
Using Summer Tires.....................................311
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................372
Accessing Your USB Song Library................375
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings.............................................................377
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................372
Line In Audio.........................................................377
Media Menu Features.......................................374
Media Voice Commands.................................372
USB 2.......................................................................377
Voice Commands for Audio Sources..........377
What's Playing?..................................................372
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............358
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu...................................................................361
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................364
Bluetooth Devices.............................................365
Making Calls........................................................360
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............358
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................359
Phone Options during an Active Call........360
Phone Voice Commands................................359
Receiving Calls...................................................360
System Settings.................................................366
Text Messaging...................................................362
Using Traction Control...............................180
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch................................................................180
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls....................180
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................180
504
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Using Voice Recognition...........................356
Initiating a Voice Session................................356
System Interaction and Feedback...............357
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................244
V
Vehicle Care...................................................279
General Information..........................................279
Vehicle Certification Label.......................326
Vehicle Identification Number................326
Vehicle Storage............................................283
Battery...................................................................284
Body.......................................................................284
Brakes....................................................................285
Cooling system...................................................284
Engine....................................................................284
Fuel system.........................................................284
General..................................................................284
Miscellaneous.....................................................285
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................285
Tires........................................................................285
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................124
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............326
Voice Control....................................................76
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................95
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................96
Anti-Lock Braking System................................96
Battery.....................................................................96
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................96
Brake System........................................................96
Cruise Control.......................................................96
Direction Indicator...............................................96
Door Ajar.................................................................96
Electric Park Brake...............................................97
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................97
Engine Oil.................................................................97
Fasten Safety Belt................................................97
Front Airbag............................................................97
Heads Up Display.................................................97
High Beam...............................................................97
Hood Ajar.................................................................97
Low Fuel Level.......................................................97
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................97
Low Washer Fluid................................................98
Parking Lamps......................................................98
Powertrain Fault...................................................98
Service Engine Soon...........................................98
Stability Control...................................................98
Stability Control Off............................................98
Washer Fluid Check....................................269
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................279
See: Wipers and Washers.................................78
Waxing............................................................280
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................315
Wheels and Tires.........................................286
General Information.........................................286
Technical Specifications..................................319
Windows and Mirrors...................................88
Windshield Washers.....................................79
Front Camera Washer........................................80
Windshield Wipers.........................................78
Intermittent Wipe.................................................78
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................78
Wipers and Washers.....................................78
505
Edge/Galaxy/S-MAX (CDQ), enUSA, First Printing
Index
